Beruflich Dokumente
Kultur Dokumente
Foreword
Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD
owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with WARNING
confidence. It was produced using the latest
DRIVING
techniques and strict quality control. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMA- This vehicle will handle and maneuver
TION REMINDERS FOR SAFETY! differently from an ordinary passenger
This manual was prepared to help you under-
car because it has a higher center of
stand the operation and maintenance of your
Follow these important driving rules to gravity for off-road use. As with other
vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles of
help ensure a safe and comfortable trip vehicles with features of this type, failure
driving pleasure. Please read through this
for you and your passengers! to operate this vehicle correctly may
manual before operating your vehicle.
. NEVER drive under the influence of result in loss of control or an accident.
A separate Warranty Information Booklet Be sure to read “On-pavement and off-
alcohol or drugs.
explains details about the warranties cov- road driving precautions”, “Avoiding colli-
ering your vehicle. The NISSAN Service . ALWAYS observe posted speed lim- sion and rollover” and “Driving safety
and Maintenance Guide explains details its and never drive too fast for precautions” in the “5. Starting and driv-
about maintaining and servicing your ve- conditions. ing” section of this manual.
hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer . ALWAYS give your full attention to
Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will
explain how to resolve any concerns you
driving and avoid using vehicle MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
features or taking other actions that
may have with your vehicle, as well as This vehicle should not be modified.
clarify your rights under your state’s lemon could distract you. Modification could affect its performance,
law. . ALWAYS use your seat belts and safety or durability, and may even violate
appropriate child restraint systems. governmental regulations. In addition,
Your NISSAN dealer knows your vehicle best.
Pre-teen children should be seated damage or performance problems result-
When you require any service or have any
in the rear seat. ing from modification may not be covered
questions, we will be glad to assist you with the
under NISSAN warranties.
extensive resources available to us. . ALWAYS provide information about
the proper use of vehicle safety
READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE SAFELY features to all occupants of the
WHEN READING THE MANUAL
Before driving your vehicle, read your Owner’s vehicle. This manual includes information for all
Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with . ALWAYS review this Owner’s Man- options available on this model. Therefore,
controls and maintenance requirements, assist- you may find some information that does
ual for important safety information.
ing you in the safe operation of your vehicle. not apply to your vehicle.
All information, specifications and illustrations in Arrows in an illustration that are similar to those
this manual are those in effect at the time of above call attention to an item in the illustration.
printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change
specifications or design at any time without CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
notice. WARNING
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT WARNING
THIS MANUAL
You will see various symbols in this manual. They Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-
are used in the following ways: ents, and certain vehicle components
contain or emit chemicals known to the
WARNING State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive
This is used to indicate the presence of harm. In addition, certain fluids con-
a hazard that could cause death or SIC0697
tained in vehicles and certain products
serious personal injury. To avoid or If you see the symbol above, it means “Do not of component wear contain or emit
reduce the risk, the procedures must do this” or “Do not let this happen”. chemicals known to the State of Cali-
be followed precisely. fornia to cause cancer and birth defects
or other reproductive harm.
CAUTION If you see a symbol similar to those above in an CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVI-
illustration, it means the arrow points to the front SORY
This is used to indicate the presence of of the vehicle.
a hazard that could cause minor or Some vehicle parts, such as lithium bat-
moderate personal injury or damage to teries, may contain perchlorate material.
your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, The following advisory is provided: “Per-
chlorate Material - special handling may
the procedures must be followed care- Arrows in an illustration that are similar to those apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/
fully. above indicate movement or action. hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”
BLUETOOTH® is a trademark
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
U.S.A.
*
C 2009 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD.
However, if there is something that your The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for You can write to NISSAN with the information at:
NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you the following information: For U.S. customers
would like to provide NISSAN directly with Nissan North America, Inc.
comments or questions, please contact the — Your name, address, and telephone number
Consumer Affairs Department
NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using — Vehicle identification number (attached to P.O. Box 685003
our toll-free number: the top of the instrument panel on the Franklin, TN 37068-5003
driver’s side) For Canadian customers
For U.S. customers
Nissan Canada Inc.
1-800-NISSAN-1 — Date of purchase
5290 Orbitor Drive
(1-800-647-7261) — Current odometer reading Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
For Canadian customers
1-800-387-0122 — Your NISSAN dealer’s name
— Your comments or questions
OR
We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.
In case of emergency 6
Index 10
Seats, seat belts and Supplemental Restraint Meters and gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9
System (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2 Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-10
Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3 VQ35DE engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-10
Exterior rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5 Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-11
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-7
SSI0372B
EXTERIOR FRONT
1. Hood (P.3-18)
2. Headlight and turn signal lights
— Switch operation (P.2-32)
— Bulb replacement (P.8-25)
3. Windshield wiper and washer
— Switch operation (P.2-28)
— Rain-sensing auto wiper system*
(P.2-29)
— Blade replacement (P.8-17)
— Window washer fluid (P.8-12)
4. Roof rack (rail)* (P.2-47)
5. Moonroof* (P.2-51)
6. Power windows (P.2-48)
7. Recovery hook (P.6-15)
8. License plate installation (P.9-11)
9. Fog lights*
— Switch operation (P.2-35)
— Bulb replacement (P.8-27)
10. Tires
— Wheel and tires (P.8-30, P.9-7)
— Flat tire (6-2)
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(P.2-12, P.5-3)
11. Outside mirrors (P.3-29)
12. Doors
— Keys (P.3-2)
— Door locks (P.3-4)
— Intelligent Key system (P.3-7)
— Security system (P.2-25)
13. Child safety rear door lock (P.3-7)
SSI0373
EXTERIOR REAR
SSI0374
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
SSI0636
INSTRUMENT PANEL
7. Steering wheel
— Horn (P.2-36)
— Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-45)
— Power steering system (P.5-25)
8. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right side)
— Cruise control switches (P.5-18)
9. Wiper and washer switch (P.2-28)
10. Push-button ignition switch (P.5-9)
11. Center ventilator (P.4-25)
12. Center display (P.4-2)/Center color display*
(P.4-2)/Navigation system**
13. Heater/air conditioner or
Center multi-function control panel*
— Navigation system**
— Vehicle information and setting buttons (P.4-8)
— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System (P.4-75)
— Audio system (P.4-31)
14. Hazard warning flasher switch (P.2-36)
15. Front passenger supplemental air bag (P.1-45)
16. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch
(P.2-39, 5-27)
17. Hood release handle (P.3-18)
18. Power lift gate main switch (P.3-19)
19. Power seatback switch* (P.1-6)
SSI0627
20. Fuse box cover (P.8-21)
1. Side ventilator (P.4-25) 5. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)* 21. Parking brake (P.5-17)
2. Power lift gate switch* (P.3-19) — Audio control* (P.4-61) 22. Tilting telescopic steering wheel lever or switch
— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System control* (P.3-25)
3. Headlight, fog light* and turn signal switch
(P.4-75) 23. Intelligent Key port (P.5-11)
(P.2-32)
6. Meters and gauges (P.2-4)
4. Fuel-filler door opener switch (P.3-23)
SSI0377
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
SDI2172
Warning Indicator
Name Page Name Page
light light
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK
2-10 2-14
light (AWD models)* indicator light (AWD models)*
Continuously Variable Trans-
Anti-lock Braking System mission (CVT) position indicator 2-15
2-11 light
(ABS) warning light
MEMO
SEATS
CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be
SSS0133 sure not to contact any moving parts to
avoid possible injuries and/or da-
mages.
well back in the seat with both feet
WARNING on the floor and adjust the seat
. Do not ride in a moving vehicle properly. See “PRECAUTIONS ON
when the seatback is reclined. This SEAT BELT USAGE” later in this
can be dangerous. The shoulder belt section.
will not be against your body. In an . After adjustment, gently rock in the
accident, you could be thrown into it seat to make sure it is securely
and receive neck or other serious locked.
injuries. You could also slide under . Do not leave children unattended
the lap belt and receive serious inside the vehicle. They could un-
internal injuries. knowingly activate switches or con-
. For the most effective protection trols. Unattended children could
when the vehicle is in motion, the become involved in serious acci-
seat should be upright. Always sit dents.
1-2 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
SSS0792 SSS0793
FRONT SEATS The reclining feature allows adjustment of the Seat lifter (if so equipped):
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
Front manual seat adjustment added comfort and to help obtain proper seat Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to
belt fit. (See “PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT adjust the seat height until the desired position
Forward and backward: is achieved.
USAGE” later in this section.) Also, the seatback
Pull the lever *
1 up and hold it while you slide can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when
the seat forward or backward to the desired the vehicle is stopped and the transmission in
position. Release the lever to lock the seat in the P (Park) position.
position.
Reclining:
To recline the seatback, pull the lever *
2 up and
lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull
the lever up and lean your body forward. Release
the lever to lock the seatback in position.
SSS1026 SSS1027
Forward and backward: the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in Seat lifter (if so equipped):
the P (Park) position.
Moving the switch * forward or backward will
1 Push the front or rear end of the switch up or
slide the seat forward or backward to the down to adjust the angle of the front portion or
desired position. height of the seat.
Reclining:
Move the recline switch * 2 backward until the
desired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback
forward again, move the switch * 2 forward.
SSS1028 SSS0569
If the control unit detects any obstacle or . Do not fold down the rear seats
malfunctions while in the power operation, a when occupants are in the rear seat
beep sounds for 4 seconds and the seatback area or any luggage is on the rear
will return to the folded position automatically. seats.
Check if there are any obstacles caught that
prevent seats from returning to the folded . When folding or returning the seat-
position. See a NISSAN dealer if the beep still backs to the upright position, to
sounds. avoid injury to yourself and others:
— Make sure that the seat path is
CAUTION clear before moving the seat.
— Be careful not to allow hands or
When operating the rear power seat-
feet to get caught or pinched in
back return, make sure that the vehicle
the seat.
is stopped and the transmission is in
SSS0821 the P (Park) position. . Properly secure all cargo to help
prevent it from sliding or shifting.
To return the seatbacks: Do not place cargo higher than the
Manual operation: WARNING seatbacks. In a sudden stop or
collision, unsecured cargo could
Lift up each seatback and push it to the upright . Never allow anyone to ride in the cause personal injury.
position until it is latched. cargo area or on the rear seats
. When returning the seatbacks, be
Power operation (if so equipped): when they are in the fold-down
sure to attach the rear center seat
position. In a collision, people riding
Push and hold the corresponding switch located belt connector.
in these areas are more likely to be
on the lower side of the instrument panel *B or
seriously injured or killed. . Do not unfasten the rear center seat
the right or left side in the cargo area *
A . belt connector except when folding
. Do not allow people to ride in any
A beep sounds once and the seatback will be down the rear seat.
area of your vehicle that is not
returned automatically. equipped with seats and seat belts. . When attaching the rear center seat
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is belt connector, be certain that the
A beep sounds twice when the seatback is fully
returned to the seating position. in a seat and using a seat belt seatbacks are completely secured in
properly. the latched position and the rear
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING
Head restraints supplement the other
vehicle safety systems. They may pro-
vide additional protection against injury
in certain rear end collisions. Adjust the
head restraints properly, as specified in
this section. Check the adjustment after
someone else uses the seat. Do not
attach anything to the head restraint
stalks or remove the head restraint. Do
not use the seat if the head restraint SSS1013 SSS0992
has been removed. If the head restraint The illustration shows the seating positions
was removed, reinstall and properly
Components
equipped with head restraints. The head re- 1. Head restraint
adjust the head restraint before an straints are adjustable.
occupant uses the seating position. 2. Adjustment notches
Failure to follow these instructions Indicates the seating position is equipped
can reduce the effectiveness of the with a head restraint. 3. Lock knob
head restraints. This may increase the 4. Stalks
risk of serious injury or death in a
collision.
Adjustment To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push
Adjust the head restraint so the center is level the head restraint down.
with the center of your ears.
WARNING
The adjustable headrests supplement
the other vehicle safety systems. They
may provide additional protection
against injury in certain rear end colli-
sions. Adjust the headrests properly, as
specified in this section. Check the
adjustment after someone else uses SSS1014 SSS0992
the seat. Do not attach anything to the
adjustable headrest stalks or remove The illustration shows the seating positions Components
the adjustable headrests. Do not use equipped with adjustable headrests. The head- 1. Adjustable headrest
the seat if the adjustable headrests rests are adjustable.
2. Adjustment notches
have been removed. If the headrest Indicates the seating position is equipped
was removed, reinstall and properly with an adjustable headrest. 3. Lock knob
adjust the headrest before an occupant
4. Stalks
uses the seating position. Failure to
follow these instructions can reduce the
effectiveness of the adjustable head-
rests. This may increase the risk of
serious injury or death in a collision.
Adjustment To raise the headrest, pull it up. To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push
Adjust the headrest so the center is level with the headrest down.
the center of your ears.
3. Remove the headrest from the seat. 2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the
headrest down.
4. Store the headrest properly in a secure
place so it is not loose in the vehicle. 3. Properly adjust the headrest before an
occupant uses the seating position.
5. Install and properly adjust the headrest
before an occupant uses the seating posi-
tion.
SEAT BELTS
SSS0134
activated, it cannot be reused and CHILD SAFETY fit them properly. The shoulder belt may
must be replaced together with the Children need adults to help protect them. come too close to the face or neck. The
retractor. See a NISSAN dealer. They need to be properly restrained. lap belt may not fit over their small hip
. Removal and installation of the bones. In an accident, an improperly
In addition to the general information in this fitting seat belt could cause serious or
pretensioner system components manual, child safety information is available from
should be done by a NISSAN dealer. fatal injury. Always use appropriate
many other sources, including doctors, teachers,
government traffic safety offices, and community child restraints.
. All seat belt assemblies, including
retractors and attaching hardware, organizations. Every child is different, so be sure
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
should be inspected after any colli- to learn the best way to transport your child.
territories require the use of approved child
sion by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN There are three basic types of child restraint restraints for infants and small children. (See
recommends that all seat belt as- systems: “CHILD RESTRAINTS” later in this section.)
semblies in use during a collision be
. Rear-facing child restraint Also, there are other types of child restraints
replaced unless the collision was available for larger children for additional pro-
minor and the belts show no da- . Front-facing child restraint tection.
mage and continue to operate prop-
. Booster seat NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens
erly. Seat belt assemblies not in use
during a collision should also be The proper restraint depends on the child’s size. and children be restrained in the rear seat.
Generally, infants (up to about 1 year and less According to accident statistics, children
inspected and replaced if either
than 20 lb (9 kg)) should be placed in rear- are safer when properly restrained in the
damage or improper operation is rear seat than in the front seat.
noted. facing child restraints. Front-facing child re-
straints are available for children who outgrow This is especially important because your
. All child restraints and attaching rear-facing child restraints and are at least 1 vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-
hardware should be inspected after year old. Booster seats are used to help position tem (air bag system) for the front passen-
any collision. Always follow the a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no ger. (See “SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
restraint manufacturer’s inspection longer use a front-facing child restraint. SYSTEM” later in this section.)
instructions and replacement re-
commendations. The child restraints WARNING Infants
should be replaced if they are Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed
damaged. Infants and children need special pro- in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-
tection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not mends that infants be placed in child restraints
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17
that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety close to the face or neck or if the lap portion of your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety the seat belt goes across the abdomen. The specific recommendations.
Standards. You should choose a child restraint booster seat should raise the child so that the
that fits your vehicle and always follow the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the INJURED PERSONS
manufacturer’s instructions for installation and top, middle portion of the shoulder and the lap NISSAN recommends that injured persons use
use. belt is low on the hips. A booster seat can only seat belts, depending on the injury. Check with
be used in seating positions that have a three- your doctor for specific recommendations.
Small children point type seat belt. The booster seat should fit
Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
least 20 lb (9 kg) can be placed in a front-facing complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
child restraint. Refer to the manufacturer’s Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
instructions for minimum and maximum weight Standards. Once the child has grown so the WARNING
and height recommendations. NISSAN recom- shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face
mends that small children be placed in child and neck, use the shoulder belt without the . Every person who drives or rides in
restraints that comply with Federal Motor booster seat. this vehicle should use a seat belt at
Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor all times.
Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a WARNING . Do not ride in a moving vehicle
child restraint that fits your vehicle and always when the seatback is reclined. This
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for instal- Never let a child stand or kneel on any can be dangerous. The shoulder belt
lation and use. seat and do not allow a child in the will not be against your body. In an
Larger children cargo areas while the vehicle is moving. accident, you could be thrown into it
The child could be seriously injured or and receive neck or other serious
Children who are too large for child restraints
should be seated and restrained by the seat killed in an accident or sudden stop. injuries. You could also slide under
belts which are provided. The seat belt may not the lap belt and receive serious
fit properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in (142.5 PREGNANT WOMEN internal injuries.
cm) tall and weighs between 40 lb (18 kg) and NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use . For the most effective protection
80 lb (36 kg). A booster seat should be used to seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug, when the vehicle is in motion, the
obtain proper seat belt fit. and always position the lap belt as low as seat should be upright. Always sit
NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a possible around the hips, not the waist. Place well back in the seat with both feet
commercially available booster seat if the the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across
on the floor and adjust the seat belt
shoulder belt in the child’s seating position fits your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over
1-18 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
SSS0292
3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug The ALR mode should be used only for Unfastening the seat belts
on the hips as shown. child restraint installation. During normal To unfasten the seat belt, push the button on the
seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR buckle. The seat belt automatically retracts.
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the mode should not be activated. If it is
retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the activated, it may cause uncomfortable seat
shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder
Checking seat belt operation
belt tension. Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat
and across your chest.
belt movement by two separate methods:
The front passenger seat and the rear seating WARNING . When the belt is pulled quickly from the
positions three-point seat belts have two modes
of operation: When fastening the seat belts, be retractor.
. Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) certain that seatbacks are completely . When the vehicle slows down rapidly.
secured in the latched position. If they
. Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) are not completely secured, passengers To increase your confidence in the seat belts,
may be injured in an accident or sudden check the operation as follows:
The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
allows the seat belt to extend and retract to stop. . Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward
quickly. The retractor should lock and
1-20 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
in the correct position, serious per- Attaching rear center seat belt:
sonal injury may result in an acci- Always be sure the rear center seat belt
dent or sudden stop. connector tongue and connector buckle are
attached. Disconnect only when folding down
the rear seat.
To connect the buckle:
1. Pull out the connector tongue from the
retractor base *
1 .
WARNING
. Do not unfasten the rear center seat
belt connector except when folding
down the rear seat.
SSS0232 . When attaching the rear center seat
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Vehicle Safety Standard 213. The LATCH anchor points are provided to install
child restraints in the rear outboard seating
. Check the child restraint in your vehicle to positions only. Do not attempt to install a child
be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s restraint in the center position using the LATCH
seat and seat belt system. anchors.
. If the child restraint is compatible with your
vehicle, place your child in the child restraint
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the child restraint is compatible with
your child. Choose a child restraint that is
designed for your child’s height and weight.
Always follow all recommended procedures.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small SSS0419B
children be restrained in an approved child LATCH system anchor location
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated. Canadian law requires the
top tether strap on front-facing child
restraints to be secured to the designated
anchor point on the vehicle.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
System (LATCH)
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor
points that are used with Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren System (LATCH) compa-
tible child restraints. This system may also be
referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible
system. With this system, you do not have to use
a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint.
SSS0637
LATCH system lower anchor
1-28 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
. Attach LATCH system compatible
child restraints only at the locations
shown in the illustration. If a child
restraint is not secured properly,
your child could be seriously injured
or killed in an accident. SSS0643 SSS0644
LATCH webbing-mounted attachment LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
. Do not secure a child restraint in the LATCH child restraints generally require the use
Installing child restraint LATCH anchor
center rear seating position using of a top tether strap. (See “TOP TETHER
the LATCH anchors. The child re-
attachments
STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT” later in this section
straint will not be secured properly. LATCH compatible child restraints include two for installation instructions.)
rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can
. Child restraint anchor points are be connected to two anchors located at certain When installing a child restraint, carefully read
designed to withstand only those seating positions in your vehicle. With this and follow the instructions in this manual and
loads imposed by correctly fitted system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat those supplied with the child restraint. (See
child restraints. Under no circum- belt to secure the child restraint. Check your “CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
stances are they to be used for adult child restraint for a label stating that it is LATCH” later in this section.)
seat belts or harnesses. compatible with LATCH system. This information
may also be in the instructions provided by the TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RE-
child restraint manufacturer. STRAINT
If the manufacturer of your child restraint
requires the use of a top tether strap, it must
be secured to an anchor point.
4. Tighten the tether strap according to the ing your fingers into the lower
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any anchor area and feeling to make
slack. sure there are no obstructions over
If you have any questions when installing a the LATCH anchors, such as seat
top tether strap child restraint on the rear belt webbing or seat cushion mate-
seat, consult your NISSAN dealer for de- rial. The child restraint will not be
tails. secured properly if the LATCH an-
chors are obstructed.
CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION
USING LATCH Front-facing
Follow these steps to install a front-facing child
WARNING restraint using LATCH system:
. Attach LATCH system compatible 1. Adjust the rear seatback to the upright SSS0645
child restraints only at the locations position. Front-facing (webbing-mounted) — step 3
shown. For the LATCH lower anchor 2. Position the child restraint on the seat. 3. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-
locations, see “Lower Anchors and Always follow the child restraint manufac- ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
Te t h e r s f o r C H i l d r e n Sy s t e m turer’s instructions. to make sure the LATCH attachment is
properly attached to the lower anchors.
(LATCH)” earlier in this section. If a
child restraint is not secured prop-
erly, your child could be seriously
injured or killed in an accident.
. The LATCH anchors are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed
by correctly fitted child restraints.
Under no circumstance are they to
be used for adult seat belts or
harnesses.
. Inspect the lower anchors by insert-
SSS0648 SSS0649
Rear-facing (webbing-mounted) — step 2 Rear-facing (rigid-mounted) — step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
to make sure the LATCH attachment is
properly attached to the lower anchors.
SSS0639 SSS0650
Rear-facing — step 3 Rear-facing — step 4
3. For child restraints that are equipped with 4. After attaching the child restraint, test it
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any before you place the child in it. Push it from
additional slack from the anchor attach- side to side while holding the seat near the
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly LATCH attachment path. The child restraint
in the center of the child restraint with your should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm)
hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion from side to side. Try to tug it forward and
and seatback while tightening the webbing check to see if the LATCH attachment holds
of the anchor attachments. the restraint in place. If the restraint is not
secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as
necessary, or put the restraint in another
seat and test it again. You may need to try a
different child restraint. Not all child re-
straints fit in all types of vehicles.
However, if you must install a front- . A child restraint with a top tether
facing child restraint in the front strap should not be used in the front
passenger seat, move the passen- passenger seat.
ger seat to the rearmost position.
Also, be sure the front passenger air The instructions in this section apply to child
bag status light is illuminated to restraint installation using the vehicle seat belts
indicate the passenger air bag is in the rear seat or the front passenger seat.
OFF. See “Front passenger air bag
and status light” later in this section
for details.
. The three-point seat belt in your
vehicle is equipped with an Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) which
SSS0100
must be used when installing a child
CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION restraint.
USING THE SEAT BELTS . Failure to use the ALR mode will
result in the child restraint not being
properly secured. The restraint
WARNING could tip over or otherwise be un-
. Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air secured and cause injury to the child
Bag System, never install a rear- in a sudden stop or collision.
facing child restraint in the front . When using the rear center seat belt
passenger seat. Front air bags in- to install a child restraint, make sure
flate with great force. A rear-facing the connector tongue and the seat
child restraint could be struck by the belt tongue are secured. Do not use
front air bag in a crash and could the seat belt with only the seat belt
seriously injure or kill your child. tongue attached. This could result in
. NISSAN recommends that child re- serious personal injury in case of an
straints be installed in the rear seat. accident or sudden stop.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35
SSS0641 SSS0823
Front-facing — step 8 Front-facing — step 11
8. After attaching the child restraint, test it 11. If the child restraint is installed in the front
before you place the child in it. Push it from passenger seat, turn the ignition switch to
side to side while holding the seat near the the ON position. The front passenger air bag
seat belt path. The child restraint should not status light should illuminate. If this
move more than 1 inch (25 mm) from side to light is not illuminated, see “Front passenger
side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if air bag and status light” later in this section.
the belt holds the restraint in place. If the Move the child restraint to another
restraint is not secure, tighten the belt as seating position. Have the system
necessary, or put the restraint in another checked by a NISSAN dealer.
seat and test it again. You may need to try a
different child restraint. Not all child re- After the child restraint is removed and the seat
straints fit in all types of vehicles. belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child
restraint mode) is canceled.
BOOSTER SEATS
7. Check that the retractor is in the ALR mode between the adult and parts of the
by trying to pull more seat belt out of the vehicle. Also, do not put the same
retractor. If you cannot pull any more seat seat belt around both your child and
belt webbing out of the retractor, the yourself.
retractor is in the ALR mode.
. NISSAN recommends that the boos-
8. Check to make sure that the child restraint is ter seat be installed in the rear seat.
properly secured prior to each use. If the According to accident statistics,
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3
children are safer when properly
through 7.
restrained in the rear seat than in
After the child restraint is removed and the seat the front seat. If you must install a
belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint booster seat in the front seat, see
mode) is canceled. “BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION”
later in this section.
SSS0099
. A booster seat must only be in-
PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTER SEATS stalled in a seating position that has
a lap/shoulder belt. Failure to use a
three-point type seat belt with a
WARNING booster seat can result in a serious
. Infants and small children should injury in sudden stop or collision.
always be placed in an appropriate . Improper use or improper installa-
child restraint while riding in the tion of a booster seat can increase
vehicle. Failure to use a child re- the risk or severity of injury for both
straint or booster seat can result in the child and other occupants of the
serious injury or death. vehicle and can lead to serious
. Infants and small children should injury or death in an accident.
never be carried on your lap. It is not . Do not use towels, books, pillows or
possible for even the strongest other items in place of a booster
adult to resist the forces of a severe seat. Items such as these may move
accident. The child could be crushed
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41
during normal driving or a collision the belt is away from the child’s face
and result in serious injury or death. and neck and the lap portion of the
Booster seats are designed to be belt does not cross the abdomen.
used with a lap/shoulder belt. Boos- . Do not put the shoulder belt behind
ter seats are designed to properly the child or under the child’s arm. If
route the lap and shoulder portions you must install a booster seat in
of the seat belt over the strongest the front seat, see “BOOSTER SEAT
portions of a child’s body to provide INSTALLATION” later in this section.
the maximum protection during a
. When your booster seat is not in
collision.
use, keep it secured with a seat belt
. Follow all of the booster seat man- to prevent it from being thrown
ufacturer’s instructions for installa- around in case of a sudden stop or
tion and use. When purchasing a accident. LRS0455
booster seat, be sure to select one
which will fit your child and vehicle. Booster seats of various sizes are offered by
It may not be possible to properly CAUTION several manufacturers. When selecting any
install some types of booster seats booster seat, keep the following points in mind:
in your vehicle. Remember that a booster seat left in a
. Choose only a booster seat with a label
. If the booster seat and seat belt is closed vehicle can become very hot.
certifying that it complies with Federal Motor
not used properly, the risk of a child Check the seating surface and buckles Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian
being injured in a collision or a before placing your child in the booster Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
sudden stop greatly increases. seat.
. Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be
. Adjustable seatbacks should be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
positioned to fit the booster seat, and seat belt system.
but as upright as possible.
. After placing the child in the booster
seat and fastening the seat belt,
make sure the shoulder portion of
WARNING
NISSAN recommends that booster
seats be installed in the rear seat.
However, if you must install a booster
seat in the front passenger seat, move
the passenger’s seat to the rearmost
position.
CAUTION
LRS0453 LRS0464
Do not use the lap/shoulder belt Auto-
. Make sure the child’s head will be properly . If the booster seat is compatible with your matic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode
supported by the booster seat or vehicle vehicle, place your child in the booster seat when using a booster seat with the
seat. The seatback must be at or above the and check the various adjustments to be seat belts.
center of the child’s ears. For example, if a sure the booster seat is compatible with
low back booster seat * 1 is chosen, the your child. Always follow all recommended Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the
vehicle seatback must be at or above the procedures. rear seat or in the front passenger seat:
center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is
lower than the center of the child’s ears, a All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
high back booster seat * 2 should be used.
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated.
The instructions in this section apply to booster
seat installation in the rear seats or the front
passenger seat.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM
PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
section contains important information concern-
ing the following systems:
. Driver and passenger supplemental front-
impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag
System)
. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bag
. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-
over supplemental air bag
LRS0454 SSS0823
Front passenger seat . Seat belt pretensioner
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc- 7. If the booster seat is installed in the front
tions for properly fastening a seat belt passenger seat, turn the ignition switch to Supplemental front-impact air bag system:
shown in the “THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT the ON position. The front passenger air bag The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can
BELT” earlier in this section. status light may or may not be help cushion the impact force to the head and
illuminated depending on the size of the chest of the driver and front passenger in certain
child and the type of booster seat used. frontal collisions.
(See “Front passenger air bag and status
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
light” later in this section.)
mental air bag system: This system can help
cushion the impact force to the chest area of the
driver and front passenger in certain side impact
collisions. The side air bags are designed to
inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag system: This
system can help cushion the impact force to the
SSS0132
back against the seatback and as crease the risk that they are injured
WARNING far-away as practical from the steer- if the front air bag inflates.
. The front air bags ordinarily will not ing wheel or instrument panel. Al-
inflate in the event of a side impact, ways use the seat belts.
rear impact, rollover, or lower se- . The driver and front passenger seat
verity frontal collision. Always wear belt buckles are equipped with
your seat belts to help reduce the sensors that detect if the seat belts
risk or severity of injury in various are fastened. The Advanced Air Bag
kinds of accidents. System monitors the severity of a
. The front passenger air bag will not collision and seat belt usage then
inflate if the passenger air bag inflates the air bags. Failure to
status light is lit or if the front properly wear seat belts can in-
passenger seat is unoccupied. See crease the risk or severity of injury
“Front passenger air bag and status in an accident.
light” later in this section. . T he f r o n t pa s s e ng e r s e at i s
. The seat belts and the front air bags equipped with an occupant classifi-
are most effective when you are cation sensor (pattern sensor) that
sitting well back and upright in the turns the front passenger air bag
seat with both feet on the floor. The OFF under some conditions. This
front air bags inflate with great sensor is only used in this seat.
force. Even with the NISSAN Ad- Failure to be properly seated and
vanced Air Bag System, if you are wearing the seat belt can increase
unrestrained, leaning forward, sit- the risk or severity of injury in an
ting sideways or out of position in accident. See “Front passenger air
any way, you are at greater risk of bag and status light” later in this
injury or death in a crash. You may section.
also receive serious or fatal injuries . Keep hands on the outside of the
from the front air bag if you are up steering wheel. Placing them inside
against it when it inflates. Always sit the steering wheel rim could in-
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47
WARNING
. Never let children ride unrestrained
or extend their hands or face out of
the window. Do not attempt to hold
them in your lap or arms. Some
examples of dangerous riding posi-
tions are shown in the illustrations.
. Children may be severely injured or
killed when the front air bags, side
air bags or curtain and rollover air
bags inflate if they are not properly
restrained. Pre-teens and children SSS0059A SSS0140
should be properly restrained in the Do not lean against doors or windows.
rear seat, if possible.
. Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-
facing child restraint in the front
seat. An inflating front air bag could
seriously injure or kill your child.
See “CHILD RESTRAINTS” earlier in
this section for details.
SSS0188A SSS0162
. The seat belts, the side air bags and side air bag inflation.
curtain and rollover air bags are
most effective when you are sitting
well back and upright in the seat
with both feet on the floor. The side
air bag and curtain and rollover air
bag inflate with great force. Do not
allow anyone to place their hand,
leg or face near the side air bag on
the side of the seatback of the front
seat or near the side roof rails. Do
not allow anyone sitting in the front
seats or rear outboard seats to
SSS0159 extend their hand out of the window
or lean against the door. Some
examples of dangerous riding posi-
WARNING tions are shown in the previous
illustrations.
Front seat-mounted side-impact sup-
plemental air bags and roof-mounted . When sitting in the rear seat, do not
curtain side-impact and rollover supple- hold onto the seatback of the front
mental air bags: seat. If the side air bag inflates, you
. The side air bags and curtain and may be seriously injured. Be espe-
rollover air bags ordinarily will not cially careful with children, who
inflate in the event of a frontal should always be properly re-
impact, rear impact or lower severity strained. Some examples of danger-
side collision. Always wear your ous riding positions are shown in
seat belts to help reduce the risk the illustrations.
or severity of injury in various kinds . Do not use seat covers on the front
of accidents. seatbacks. They may interfere with
1-50 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Based on information from the sensors, only one save lives and reduce serious injuries. However,
front air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on an inflating front air bag may cause facial
the crash severity and whether the front abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags do
occupants are belted or unbelted. Additionally, not provide restraint to the lower body.
the front passenger air bag may be automatically
turned OFF under some conditions, depending Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat
on the information provided by the occupant belts should be correctly worn and the driver
classification sensor. If the front passenger air and passenger seated upright as far as practical
bag is OFF, the passenger air bag status light away from the steering wheel or instrument
will be illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order
light will not be illuminated, but the air bag will to help protect the front occupants. Because of
be off). (See “Front passenger air bag and this, the force of the front air bag inflating can
status light” later in this section for further increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too
details.) One front air bag inflating does not close to, or is against, the air bag module during
indicate improper performance of the system. inflation.
SSS0823
If you have any questions about your air bag The front air bags will deflate quickly after a Front passenger air bag status light
system, contact NISSAN or a NISSAN dealer. If collision. Front passenger air bag and status light
you are considering modification of your vehicle The front air bags operate only when the
due to a disability, you may also contact ignition switch is in the ON position. WARNING
NISSAN. Contact information is contained in
the front of this Owner’s Manual. After pushing the ignition switch to the ON The front passenger air bag is designed
position, the supplemental air bag warning to automatically turn OFF under some
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise light illuminates. The supplemental air bag conditions. Read this section carefully
may be heard, followed by release of smoke. warning light will turn off after about 7 to learn how it operates. Proper use of
This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate seconds if the system is operational. the seat, seat belt and child restraints is
a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it
may cause irritation and choking. Those with a necessary for most effective protection.
history of a breathing condition should get fresh Failure to follow all instructions in this
air promptly. manual concerning the use of seats,
seat belts and child restraints can
Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts, increase the risk or severity of injury in
help to cushion the impact force on the head
an accident.
and chest of the front occupants. They can help
1-52 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Status light: to certain front passenger seat occupants, such installed in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the
as children, by requiring the air bag to be occupant classification sensor is designed to
The front passenger air bag status light automatically turned OFF. operate as described above to turn the front
is located on the instrument panel below the air passenger air bag OFF for specified child
conditioner controls. The light operates as The occupant classification sensor (pattern restraints. Failing to properly secure child
follows: sensor) is in the front passenger seat cushion restrains and to use the Automatic Locking
and is designed to detect an occupant and Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode)
. Unoccupied passenger seat: The objects on the seat. For example, if a child is in
light is OFF and the front passenger air bag may allow the restraint to tip or move in an
the front passenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag accident or sudden stop. This can also result in
is OFF and will not inflate in a crash. System is designed to turn the passenger air the passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead
. Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult, bag OFF in accordance with the regulations. of being OFF. (See “CHILD RESTRAINTS”
child or child restraint as outlined in this Also, if a child restraint of the type specified in earlier in this section for proper use and
section: The light illuminates to the regulations is on the seat, the occupant installation.)
indicate that the front passenger air bag is classification sensor can detect it and cause the
OFF and will not inflate in a crash. air bag to turn OFF. If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the
passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a
. Occupied passenger seat and the passen- Front passenger seat adult occupants who are crash. However, heavy objects placed on the
ger meets the conditions outlined in this properly seated and using the seat belt as seat could result in air bag inflation, because of
section: The light is OFF to indicate outlined in this manual should not cause the the object being detected by the occupant
that the front passenger air bag is opera- passenger air bag to be automatically turned classification sensor. Other conditions could
tional. OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF, also result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is
however, if the occupant does not sit in the seat standing on the seat, or if two children are on the
Front passenger air bag: properly (for example, by not sitting upright, by seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.
sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise Always be sure that you and all vehicle
The front passenger air bag is designed to
being out of position), this could cause the occupants are seated and restrained properly.
automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is
sensor to turn the air bag OFF. Always be sure
operated under some conditions as described
to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly Using the passenger air bag status light, you can
below as permitted by U.S. regulations. If the
for the most effective protection by the seat belt monitor when the front passenger air bag is
front passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate
and supplemental air bag. automatically turned OFF with the seat occu-
in a crash. The driver air bag and other air bags
pied. The light will not illuminate when the front
in your vehicle are not part of this system. NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil- passenger seat is unoccupied.
dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.
The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce
NISSAN also recommends that appropriate If an adult occupant is in the seat but the
the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag
child restraints and booster seats be properly passenger air bag status light is illuminated
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53
(indicating that the air bag is OFF), it could be If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air (hot steam cleaners) on the seat.
that the person is a small adult, or is not sitting bag system, the supplemental air bag warning This can damage the seat or occu-
on the seat properly. light , located in the meter and gauges area, pant classification sensor. This can
will blink. Have the system checked by a also affect the operation of the air
If a child restraint must be used in the front seat, NISSAN dealer.
the passenger air bag status light may or may bag system and result in serious
not be illuminated, depending on the size of the Other supplemental front-impact air bag personal injury.
child and the type of child restraint being used. If precautions . Immediately after inflation, several
the air bag status light is not illuminated
front air bag system components
(indicating that the air bag might inflate in a
crash), it could be that the child restraint or seat WARNING will be hot. Do not touch them; you
belt is not being used properly. Make sure that may severely burn yourself.
. Do not place any objects on the
the child restraint is installed properly, the seat . No unauthorized changes should be
belt is used properly and the occupant is steering wheel pad or on the instru-
made to any components or wiring
positioned properly. If the air bag status light is ment panel. Also, do not place any
of the supplemental air bag system.
not illuminated, reposition the occupant or child objects between any occupant and
This is to prevent accidental infla-
restraint in a rear seat. the steering wheel or instrument
tion of the supplemental air bag or
panel. Such objects may become
If the passenger air bag status light will not damage to the supplemental air bag
dangerous projectiles and cause
illuminate even though you believe that the child system.
restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are injury if the front air bags inflate.
. Do not make unauthorized changes
properly positioned, the system may be sensing . Do not place objects with sharp
to your vehicle’s electrical system,
an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is edges on the seat. Also, do not
OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the suspension system or front end
place heavy objects on the seat that
system is OFF by using a special tool. However, structure. This could affect proper
will leave permanent impressions in
until you have confirmed with your dealer that operation of the front air bag sys-
the seat. Such objects can damage
your air bag is working properly, reposition the tem.
the seat or occupant classification
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat. . Tampering with the supplemental
sensor (pattern sensor). This can
The air bag system and passenger air bag status affect the operation of the air bag air bag system may result in serious
light will take a few seconds to register a change system and result in serious perso- personal injury. Tampering includes
in the passenger seat status. However, if the nal injury. changes to the steering wheel and
seat becomes unoccupied, the air bag status the instrument panel assembly by
light will remain off. . Do not use water or acidic cleaners
1-54 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
side collisions, although they may inflate if the driver and passenger seated upright as far as objects may become dangerous
forces in another type of collision are similar to practical away from the side air bags. Rear seat projectiles and cause injury if a side
those of a higher severity side impact. They are passengers should be seated as far away as air bag inflates.
designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle practical from the door finishers and side roof
is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side rails. The side air bags and curtain and rollover . Right after inflation, several side air
collisions. Curtain and rollover air bags are also air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect bag and curtain and rollover air bag
designed to inflate in certain types of rollover the occupants in the outboard seating positions. system components will be hot. Do
collisions or near rollovers. Because of this, the force of the side air bags not touch them; you may severely
and curtain and rollover air bags inflating can burn yourself.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too
indication of proper side air bag and curtain and . No unauthorized changes should be
close to, or is against, these air bag modules
rollover air bag operation. during inflation. The side air bags and curtain made to any components or wiring
and rollover air bags will deflate quickly after the of this side air bag and curtain and
When the side air bags and curtain and rollover
air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, collision is over. rollover air bags. This is to prevent
followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not damage to or accidental inflation of
The side air bags and curtain and rollover the side-impact air bag and curtain
harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should air bags operate only when the ignition
be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation side-impact and rollover air bag
switch is in the ON position.
and choking. Those with a history of a breathing systems.
condition should get fresh air promptly. After pushing the ignition switch to the ON . Do not make unauthorized changes
position, the supplemental air bag warning to your vehicle’s electrical system,
Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts, light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
help to cushion the impact force on the chest suspension system or side panel.
warning light will turn off after about 7
and pelvic area of the front occupants. Curtain seconds if the systems are operational. This could affect proper operation
and rollover air bags help to cushion the impact of the side air bag and curtain and
force to the head of occupants in the front and rollover air bag systems.
rear outboard seating positions. They can help WARNING
save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, . Tampering with the supplemental
side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags . Do not place any objects near the air bag system may result in serious
may cause abrasions or other injuries. Side air seatback of the front seats. Also, do personal injury. For example, do not
bags and curtain and rollover air bags do not not place any objects (an umbrella, change the front seats by placing
provide restraint to the lower body. bag, etc.) between the front door material near the seatbacks or by
finisher and the front seat. Such installing additional trim material,
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the
1-56 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
such as seat covers, around the side SEAT BELTS WITH PRETENSIONERS and probing devices should not be
air bag. (front seats) used on the pretensioner system.
. Work around and on the side air bag . If you need to dispose of a preten-
and curtain and rollover air bag WARNING sioner or scrap the vehicle, contact a
systems should be done by a NISSAN dealer. Correct preten-
NISSAN dealer. Installation of elec- . The pretensioners cannot be reused sioner disposal procedures are set
trical equipment should also be after activation. They must be re- forth in the appropriate NISSAN
done by a NISSAN dealer. The placed together with the retractor Service Manual. Incorrect disposal
Supplemental Restraint System and buckle as a unit. procedures could cause personal
(SRS) wiring harnesses* should not . If the vehicle becomes involved in a injury.
be modified or disconnected. Un- frontal collision but a pretensioner
authorized electrical test equipment is not activated, be sure to have the The pretensioner system activates in conjunc-
and probing devices should not be pretensioner system checked and, if tion with the front air bag system. The preten-
used on the side air bag and curtain necessary, replaced by a NISSAN sioner system also activates with the curtain and
dealer. rollover air bags in certain types of rollover
and rollover air bag systems.
collisions or near rollovers. Working with the
. No unauthorized changes should be seat belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt
* The SRS wiring harness connectors are made to any components or wiring when the vehicle becomes involved in certain
yellow and orange for easy identifica-
of the pretensioner system. This is types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat
tion.
to prevent damage to or accidental occupants.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you activation of the pretensioners.
The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt
inform the buyer about the side air bag and Tampering with the pretensioner
curtain and rollover air bag systems and guide retractor. These seat belts are used the same
system may result in serious perso- way as conventional seat belts.
the buyer to the appropriate sections in this nal injury.
Owner’s Manual. When a pretensioner activates, smoke is re-
. Work around and on the preten- leased and a loud noise may be heard. The
sioner system should be done by a smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a
NISSAN dealer. Installation of elec- fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it
trical equipment should also be may cause irritation and choking. Those with a
done by a NISSAN dealer. Un- history of a breathing condition should get fresh
authorized electrical test equipment air promptly.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57
the supplemental air bag warning light illumi- REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PRO- placed by a NISSAN dealer. The air
nates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. CEDURE bag modules and pretensioner sys-
This means the system is operational. tem cannot be repaired.
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain and
If any of the following conditions occur, the front rollover air bags and pretensioners are designed . The front air bag, side air bag and
air bag, side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag to activate on a one-time-only basis. As a curtain and rollover air bag systems,
and pretensioner systems need servicing: reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemen- and pretensioner system should be
tal air bag warning light will remain illuminated
. The supplemental air bag warning light after inflation has occurred. Repair and replace-
inspected by a NISSAN dealer if
remains on after approximately 7 seconds. there is any damage to the front
ment of these systems should be done only by a
NISSAN dealer. end or side portion of the vehicle.
. The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently. . If you need to dispose of a supple-
When maintenance work is required on the
mental air bag or pretensioner sys-
. The supplemental air bag warning light does vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain
and rollover air bags and pretensioners and tems, or scrap the vehicle, contact a
not come on at all. NISSAN dealer. Correct supplemen-
related parts should be pointed out to the
Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air person performing the maintenance. The ignition tal air bag and pretensioner system
bag, curtain and rollover air bag and preten- switch should always be in the LOCK position disposal procedures are set forth in
sioner systems may not operate properly. It must when working under the hood or inside the the appropriate NISSAN Service
be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to vehicle. Manual. Incorrect disposal proce-
the nearest NISSAN dealer. dures could cause personal injury.
WARNING
WARNING
. Once a front air bag, side air bag or
If the supplemental air bag warning curtain and rollover air bag has
light is on, it could mean that the front inflated, the air bag module will
air bag, side air bag, curtain and roll- not function again and must be
over air bag and/or pretensioner sys- replaced. Additionally, if any of the
tems will not operate in an accident. To front air bags inflate, the activated
help avoid injury to yourself or others, pretensioners must also be re-
have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN placed. The air bag module and
dealer as soon as possible. pretensioner system should be re-
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59
INSTRUMENT PANEL
7. Steering wheel
— Horn
— Driver supplemental air bag
— Power steering system
8. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right side)
— Cruise control switches
9. Wiper and washer switch
10. Push-button ignition switch
11. Center ventilator
12. Center display/Center color display*/Navigation
system**
13. Heater/air conditioner or
Center multi-function control panel*
— Navigation system**
— Vehicle information and setting buttons
— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
— Audio system
14. Hazard warning flasher switch
15. Front passenger supplemental air bag
16. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch
17. Hood release handle
18. Power lift gate main switch
19. Power seatback switch*
SSI0627 20. Fuse box cover
21. Parking brake
1. Side ventilator 5. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)* 22. Tilting telescopic steering wheel lever or switch
2. Power lift gate switch* — Audio control* 23. Intelligent Key port
— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System control*
3. Headlight, fog light* and turn signal switch 24. Audio system
6. Meters and gauges — Clock
4. Fuel-filler door opener switch
25. Heated seat switch*
26. Selector lever
27. Front passenger air bag status light
2-2 Instruments and controls
SSI0377
SIC3571 SIC3572
Speedometer Odometer/twin trip odometer
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER Odometer/twin trip odometer
The odometer * 1 and twin trip odometer * 2
Speedometer are displayed when the ignition switch is in the
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in ON position.
miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour
(km/h). The odometer records the total distance the
vehicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer records the distance of
individual trips.
Changing the display:
Pushing the TRIP A/B RESET switch *
3 on the
right side of the combination meter panel
changes the display as follows:
TRIP A ? TRIP B ? TRIP A
Instruments and controls 2-5
CAUTION
If the gauge indicates engine coolant
temperature near the hot (H) end of the
normal range, reduce vehicle speed to
decrease temperature. If gauge is over
the normal range, stop the vehicle as
soon as safely possible. If the engine is
overheated, continued operation of the
vehicle may seriously damage the en-
gine. See “IF YOUR VEHICLE OVER-
HEATS” in the “6. In case of emergency”
section for immediate action required.
SIC3573 SIC3574
CAUTION
. If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
malfunction indicator light
(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon
as possible. After a few driving trips,
the light should turn off. If the
light remains on after a few driving
SIC3575 trips, have the vehicle inspected by SIC3181
a NISSAN dealer. When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
FUEL GAUGE
. For additional information, see position, the compass display * B will indicate
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” the direction of the vehicle’s heading.
in the tank.
later in this section.
The gauge may move slightly during braking,
turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.
The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after the
ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge
registers “E” (Empty).
The low fuel warning appears on the dot
matrix liquid crystal display when the fuel tank is
getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient,
preferably before the gauge reaches “E”. There
SIC0611B
Zone map
2-8 Instruments and controls
ZONE VARIATION CHANGE PROCE- pass point when the vehicle moves to an
DURE area where the geomagnetism is stabilized.)
The difference between magnetic north and
geographical north is known as variance. In CAUTION
some areas, this difference can sometimes be
great enough to cause false compass readings. . Do not install a ski rack, antenna,
Follow these instructions to set the variance for etc., which are attached to the
your particular location if this happens: vehicle by means of a magnet. They
affect the operation of the compass.
1. Push the switch for more than 3
seconds. The current zone number will . When cleaning the mirror, use a
appear in the display. paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner. Do
2. Find your current location and variance not spray glass cleaner directly on
number on the zone map.
the mirror as it may cause the liquid
NOTE: cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
Use zone number 5 for Hawaii.
3. Push the switch repeatedly until the
new zone number appears in the display,
then release the switch. After you release
the switch, the display will show a compass
direction within a few seconds.
. If the compass deviates from the correct
indication soon after repeated adjust-
ment, have the compass checked at a
NISSAN dealer.
. The compass may not indicate the
correct compass point in tunnels or
while driving up or down a steep hill.
(The compass returns to the correct com-
Instruments and controls 2-9
Intelligent Key warning light Front passenger air bag status light *: if so equipped
blink. (See “ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD)” in the not worn. Parking brake indicator:
“5. Starting and driving” section.) . If the warning light is still on after When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the above operations, have your the light comes on when the parking brake is
CAUTION vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer applied.
as soon as possible.
. If the warning light comes on while Low brake fluid warning light:
driving there may be a malfunction
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
in the AWD system. Reduce the or Anti-lock Braking System the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the
vehicle speed and have your vehicle (ABS) warning light light comes on while the engine is running with
checked by a NISSAN dealer as the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle
soon as possible. When the ignition switch is in the ON position, and perform the following:
. If the AWD warning light blinks the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates 1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid
when you are driving: as necessary. (See “BRAKE FLUID” in the
the ABS is operational.
— blinks rapidly (about twice a “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-
second): If the ABS warning light illuminates while the tion.)
engine is running, or while driving, it may
Pull off the road in a safe area, indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. 2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the
and idle the engine. The driving Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. warning system checked by a NISSAN
mode will change to 2WD to dealer.
prevent the AWD system from If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock
function is turned off. The brake system then Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
malfunctioning. If the warning indicator:
operates normally, but without anti-lock assis-
light turns off, you can drive tance. (See “BRAKE SYSTEM” in the “5.
again. When the parking brake is released and the
Starting and driving” section.) brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake
— blinks slowly (about once every warning light and the Anti-lock Braking System
2 seconds): or Brake warning light (ABS) warning light illuminate, it may indicate
Pull off the road in a safe area, the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the
This light functions for both the parking brake brake system checked, and if necessary re-
and idle the engine. Check that
and the foot brake systems. paired, by a NISSAN dealer promptly. (See
all tire sizes are the same, tire
“Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light”
pressure is correct and tires are
earlier in this section.)
Instruments and controls 2-11
Low tire pressure warning: “5. Starting and driving” section. checked by a NISSAN dealer. If you
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire have a flat tire, replace it with a
pressure, the warning light will illuminate. WARNING spare tire as soon as possible.
. When a spare tire is mounted or a
When the low tire pressure warning light . If the light does not illuminate with
illuminates, you should stop and adjust the tire wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not
the ignition switch pushed ON, have
pressure to the recommended COLD tire function and the low tire pressure
the vehicle checked by a NISSAN
pressure shown on the Tire and Loading warning light will flash for approxi-
dealer as soon as possible.
Information label. The low tire pressure warning mately 1 minute. The light will
light does not automatically turn off when the tire . If the light illuminates while driving, remain on after 1 minute. Contact
pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to avoid sudden steering maneuvers or your NISSAN dealer as soon as
the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be abrupt braking, reduce vehicle possible for tire replacement and/
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to speed, pull off the road to a safe or system resetting.
activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire location and stop the vehicle as
pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure . Replacing tires with those not ori-
soon as possible. Driving with un-
gauge to check the tire pressure. ginally specified by NISSAN could
der-inflated tires may permanently
affect the proper operation of the
For additional information, see “TIRE PRES- damage the tires and increase the
TPMS.
SURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the likelihood of tire failure. Serious
“5. Starting and driving” section and “TIRE vehicle damage could occur and
PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” may lead to an accident and could CAUTION
in the “6. In case of emergency” section. result in serious personal injury.
TPMS malfunction:
Check the tire pressure for all four . The TPMS is not a substitute for the
tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the regular tire pressure check. Be sure
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low recommended COLD tire pressure to check the tire pressure regularly.
tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi- shown on the Tire and Loading
mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is . If the vehicle is being driven at
Information label to turn the low speeds of less than 16 MPH (25
pushed ON. The light will remain on after the 1 tire pressure warning light OFF. If
minute. Have the system checked by a NISSAN km/h), the TPMS may not operate
the light stays on after adjusting the correctly.
dealer.
tire pressure and driving over 16
For additional information, see “TIRE PRES- MPH (25 km/h), have the system . Be sure to correctly install the
SURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the specified size of tires to the four
Instruments and controls 2-13
wheels. switch is in the ON position, the system does Restraint Systems (air bag systems) and/or the
not activate the warning light for the front pretensioners may not function properly.
passenger.
For additional information, see “SUPPLEMEN-
Master warning light See “SEAT BELTS” in the “1. Safety — Seats, TAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM” in the “1. Safety —
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint
the master warning light illuminates if any of the section for precautions on seat belt usage. system” section.
following are displayed on the dot matrix liquid
crystal display: Supplemental air bag warning light WARNING
. No key warning
After pushing the ignition switch to the ON If the supplemental air bag warning
. Low fuel warning position, the supplemental air bag warning light light is on, it could mean that the front
will illuminate. The supplemental air bag warning air bag, side air bag, curtain and roll-
. Low washer fluid warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the over air bag and/or pretensioner sys-
. Parking brake release warning supplemental front air bag and supplemental tems will not operate in an accident. To
side air bag, curtain side-impact air bag systems
. Door/lift gate open warning help avoid injury to yourself or others,
and/or pretensioner seat belt are operational.
have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN
See “DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL DIS- If any of the following conditions occur, the front dealer as soon as possible.
PLAY” later in this section. air bag, side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag
and pretensioner systems needs servicing and INDICATOR LIGHTS
Seat belt warning light your vehicle must be taken to your nearest
NISSAN dealer.
The light and chime remind you to fasten seat All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK
belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition . The supplemental air bag warning light indicator light (AWD models)
switch is pushed to the ON position, and will remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
remain illuminated until the driver’s seat belt is . The supplemental air bag warning light This light illuminates when the ignition switch is
fastened. flashes intermittently. turned to the ON position, and turns off within 1
second.
The seat belt warning light for the front . The supplemental air bag warning light does
passenger will illuminate if the seat belt is not not come on at all. When selecting the LOCK mode while the
fastened when the front passenger’s seat is engine is running, this light will illuminate. (See
occupied. For 6 seconds after the ignition Unless checked and repaired, the Supplemental “ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD)” in the “5. Starting
and driving” section.)
2-14 Instruments and controls
CAUTION The light comes on when the front park, side AUDIBLE REMINDERS
marker, tail and license plate lights are on.
Continued vehicle operation without Key reminder chime
having the emission control system A chime will sound if the driver side door is
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights opened while the ignition switch is pushed to
and/or CVT system checked and re-
paired as necessary could lead to poor The light flashes when the turn signal switch the ACC position or pushed to the OFF or
driveability, reduced fuel economy, and lever or hazard switch is turned on. LOCK position with the Intelligent Key left in the
possible damage to the emission con- Intelligent Key port. Make sure the ignition
switch is pushed to the OFF position, and take
trol system.
the Intelligent Key with you when leaving the
vehicle.
SIC3577
INDICATORS FOR OPERATION pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal 2. Steering lock release malfunction
depressed. indicator (if so equipped)
1. Engine start operation indicator
You can start the engine directly in any position. This indicator appears when the steering wheel
This indicator appears when the selector lever is cannot be released from the LOCK position.
in the P (Park) position.
If this indicator appears, push the push-button
This indicator means that the engine will start by ignition switch while lightly turning the steering
2-18 Instruments and controls
wheel right and left. Unregistered key: SHIFT “P” warning ? (Move the selector
lever to “P”) ? PUSH warning ? (Push
3. Key insertion indicator The warning appears when the ignition switch is the ignition switch ? ignition switch position
This indicator appears when the key needs to be pushed from the LOCK position and the key is turned to ON) ? PUSH warning ?
inserted into the key port. cannot be recognized by the system. You cannot (Push the ignition switch ? ignition switch
start the engine with an unregistered key. Use position is turned to OFF)
If this indicator appears, insert the key into the the registered key.
key port in the correct direction. (See “PUSH- 8. Key battery discharge indicator
BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH” in the “5. Start- See “INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM” in the “3.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section for This indicator appears when the key battery is
ing and driving” section.) running out of power.
more details.
4. Key removal indicator If this indicator appears, replace the battery with
6. SHIFT “P” warning
This indicator appears when the driver’s door is a new one. (See “BATTERY REPLACEMENT” in
opened with the ignition switch in the OFF or This warning appears when the ignition switch is the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.)
LOCK position and the key placed in the key pushed to stop the engine with the selector lever
port. A key reminder chime also sounds. in any position except the P (Park) position. 9. Parking brake release warning
If this warning appears, move the selector lever This warning appears when the vehicle speed is
If this indicator appears, remove the key from the above 4 MPH (7 km/h) and the parking brake is
key port and take it with you when leaving the to the P (Park) position or push the ignition
switch to the ON position. applied.
vehicle.
An inside warning chime will also sound. (See 10. Low fuel warning
5. NO KEY warning “INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM” in the “3. Pre- This warning appears when the fuel level in the
This warning appears in either of the following driving checks and adjustments” section.) tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is
conditions. convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge
7. “PUSH” warning reaches the empty (E) position.
No key inside the vehicle:
This warning appears when the selector lever is
The warning appears when the door is closed moved to the P (Park) position with the ignition There is a small reserve of fuel remaining
with the Intelligent Key left outside the vehicle switch in the ACC position after the SHIFT “P” in the tank when the fuel gauge reaches
and the ignition switch in the ACC or ON warning appears. the empty (E) position.
position. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is
inside the vehicle. To push the ignition switch to the OFF position,
perform the following procedure:
SIC3580 SIC3673
SIC3674 SIC3675
Average fuel consumption (MPG or l Elapsed time and trip odometer (mls or
(liter)/100 km) and speed (MPH or km/h) km)
Fuel consumption: Elapsed time:
The average fuel consumption mode shows the The elapsed time mode shows the time since
average fuel consumption since the last reset. the last reset. The displayed time can be reset
Resetting is done by pushing the switch *
B by pushing the switch *B for longer than
for longer than 1 second. (The average speed is 1 second. (The trip odometer is also reset at the
also reset at the same time.) same time.)
The display is updated every 30 seconds. At Trip odometer:
about the first 1/3 mile (500 m) after a reset, the
display shows “——”. The trip odometer mode shows the total
distance the vehicle has been driven since the
Speed: last reset. Resetting is done by pushing the
switch * B for longer than 1 second. (The
The average speed mode shows the average elapsed time is also reset at the same time.)
2-22 Instruments and controls
SIC3676 SIC3677
Distance to empty (dte — mls or km) Outside air temperature (ICY — 8F or 8C)
The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you The outside air temperature is displayed in 8F or
with an estimation of the distance that can be 8C in the range of −22 to 1408F (−30 to 608C).
driven before refueling. The dte is constantly
being calculated, based on the amount of fuel in The outside air temperature mode includes a low
the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption. temperature warning feature. If the outside air
temperature is below 378F (38C), the warning is
The display is updated every 30 seconds. displayed on the screen.
The dte mode includes a low range warning The outside temperature sensor is located in
feature. If the fuel level is low, the warning is front of the radiator. The sensor may be affected
displayed on the screen. by road or engine heat, wind directions and
other driving conditions. The display may differ
When the fuel level drops even lower, the dte from the actual outside temperature or the
display will change to “——”. temperature displayed on various signs or bill-
. If the amount of fuel added is small, the boards.
display just before the ignition switch is
Instruments and controls 2-23
ALERT: . OTHER
Alert menu can be set to notify the following Select this submenu and set or reset the
items. distance for replacing items other than the
engine oil, oil filter and tires.
. TIME TO REST
To return to the top page of the setting mode,
Select this submenu to specify when the select “BACK”.
“TIME TO REST” indicator activates.
OPTIONS:
. ICY
The 3 option menus can be set to your
Select this submenu to display the low preference.
outside temperature warning.
. LANGUAGE
To return to the top page of the setting mode,
select “BACK”. Select this submenu to choose English or
SIC3678
French for display.
MAINTENANCE:
Setting . UNIT
Setting cannot be made while driving. A The maintenance intervals of the following items
message “Setting can only be operated can be set or reset for the reminders. Select this submenu to choose the unit from
when stopped” is also displayed on the dot MPG or l/100 km.
. ENGINE OIL
matrix crystal display. . DIAL EFFECTS
Select this submenu to set or reset the
The switch * A and switch *B are distance for changing the engine oil. Select this menu to set the dial effects
used in the setting mode to select and decide a described below to on or off.
menu. . OIL FILTER
— The indicator needles sweep in the
SKIP: Select this submenu to set or reset the meters and the ring illumination will be
distance for replacing the oil filter.
Push the switch *
A to move to the brightened gradually when the engine is
started.
warning check mode. . TIRE
Push the switch *
B to select other menus. Select this submenu to set or reset the To return to the top page of the setting mode,
distance for replacing tires. select “BACK”.
SECURITY SYSTEMS
SKIP:
Push the switch *
A to move to the
warning check mode.
Push the switch *
B to select other menus.
DETAIL:
This item is available only when a warning is
displayed.
Select this menu to see the details of warnings.
SIC3679 SIC2133
The alarm is activated by: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
. Unlocking the door without using the button accept any interference received, including
on the Intelligent Key, the request switch or interference that may cause undesired
the key. (Even if the door is opened by operation of the device.
releasing the door inside lock knob, the
alarm will activate.) CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-
PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY
. Opening the hood. RESPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD
How to stop an activated alarm VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER-
ATE THE EQUIPMENT.
The alarm will stop by unlocking a door by
pushing the unlock button on the Intelligent
Key, pushing the request switch or using the key.
If the system does not operate as de- SIC1699A
scribed above, have it checked by a
NISSAN dealer. Security indicator light
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYS- The security indicator light *
A indicates the
status of the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
TEM System.
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not
allow the engine to start without the use of the The light blinks after the ignition switch was in
registered key. Never leave these keys in the the ACC, OFF and LOCK position. This function
vehicle. indicates the security systems equipped on the
vehicle are operational.
Statement related to section 15 of FCC
rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is
System (CONT ASSY - CARD SLOT) malfunctioning, this light will remain on while the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Cana- If the light still remains on and/or the
da. Operation is subject to the following engine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer
two conditions; for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
Instruments and controls 2-27
service as soon as possible. Please bring mix the washer fluid concentrate
all registered keys that you have when WARNING and water.
visiting a NISSAN dealer for service.
In freezing temperatures the washer
solution may freeze on the windshield
and obscure your vision which may lead
to an accident. Warm windshield with
the defroster before you wash the
windshield.
CAUTION
. Do not operate the washer continu-
ously for more than 30 seconds.
. Do not operate the washer if the
reservoir tank is empty.
. Do not fill the window washer
reservoir tank with washer fluid
concentrates at full strength. Some
methyl alcohol based washer fluid
concentrates may permanently stain
the grille if spilled while filling the
window washer reservoir tank.
. Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates
with water to the manufacturer’s
recommended levels before pouring
the fluid into the window washer
reservoir tank. Do not use the
window washer reservoir tank to
2-28 Instruments and controls
SIC4015 SIC4017
The windshield wiper and washer operates RAIN-SENSING AUTO WIPER SYS-
when the ignition switch is in the ON position. TEM (if so equipped)
Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the The rain-sensing auto wiper system can auto-
following speed: matically turn on the wipers and adjust the wiper
*
1 Intermittent — intermittent operation can be speed depending on the rainfall and the vehicle
adjusted by turning the knob toward * A
speed by using the rain sensor located on the
(Slower) or * B (Faster).
upper part of the windshield.
For models with the rain-sensing auto wiper To set the rain-sensing auto wiper system, push
system, see “RAIN-SENSING AUTO WI- the lever down to the AUTO position * 1 . The
PER SYSTEM” later in this section. wiper will sweep once while the ignition switch
*
2 Low — continuous low speed operation is in the ON position.
*
3 High — continuous high speed operation The rain sensor sensitivity level can be adjusted
by turning the knob toward the front * 2 (High)
Push the lever up * 4 to have one sweep or toward the rear *3 (Low).
operation of the wiper.
Instruments and controls 2-29
CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the rear window defroster.
SIC4019 SIC3584
Type A
The rear window wiper and washer operate
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position
to operate the wiper.
*
1 Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation
(not adjustable)
*
2 Low (ON) — continuous low speed opera-
tion
Push the switch forward * 3 to operate the
washer. Then the wiper will also operate several
times.
SIC3667
Type B
Instruments and controls 2-31
XENON HEADLIGHTS (if so equipped) off the headlights for short intervals
(for example, when the vehicle stops at
a traffic signal). Even when the daytime
WARNING running lights are active (Canada only),
the xenon headlights do not turn on.
HIGH VOLTAGE This way the life of the xenon head-
lights is not reduced.
. When xenon headlights are on, they
produce a high voltage. To prevent . If the xenon headlight bulb is close to
burning out, the brightness will drasti-
an electric shock, never attempt to
cally decrease, the light will start
modify or disassemble. Always have blinking, or the color of the light will
your xenon headlights replaced at a become reddish. If one or more of the
NISSAN dealer. above signs appear, contact a NISSAN
. Xenon headlights provide consider- dealer.
SIC3668
ably more light than conventional
headlights. If they are not correctly HEADLIGHT SWITCH
aimed, they might temporarily blind
an oncoming driver or the driver Lighting
ahead of you and cause a serious *
1 Turn the switch to the position:
accident. If headlights are not aimed The front park, side marker, tail, license
correctly, immediately take your ve- plate and instrument lights will come on.
hicle to a NISSAN dealer and have
the headlights adjusted correctly.
*
2 Turn the switch to the position:
Headlights will come on and all the other
When the xenon headlight is initially turned on, lights remain on.
its brightness or color varies slightly. However,
the color and brightness will soon stabilize.
. The life of xenon headlights will be
shortened by frequent on-off opera-
tion. It is generally desirable not to turn
2-32 Instruments and controls
set so they turn on and off automatically. For automatic headlights off delay setting, see instrument panel. The photo sensor con-
“Auto Headlights Off Delay” in the “4. Monitor, trols the autolight; if it is covered, the
To set the autolight system: heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice photo sensor reacts as if it is dark and the
recognition systems” section. headlights will illuminate.
1. Make sure the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position *
1 .
When the headlight switch is in the or operate with the headlight switch in the OFF
position while the ignition switch is in the ON position or in the position. Turn the
position, the lights will automatically turn off 5 headlight switch to the position for full
minutes after the ignition switch has been illumination when driving at night.
pushed to the OFF position.
If the parking brake is applied before the engine
When the headlight switch remains in the is started, the daytime running lights do not
or position after the lights automatically illuminate. The daytime running lights illuminate
turn off, the lights will turn on when the ignition once the parking brake is released. The daytime
switch is pushed to the ON position. running lights will remain on until the ignition
switch is pushed to the OFF position.
CAUTION
WARNING
. When you turn on the headlight
SIC3670 switch again after the lights auto- When the daytime running light system
matically turn off, the lights will not is active, tail lights on your vehicle are
Headlight beam select turn off automatically. Be sure to not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on
*
1 To select the low beam, put the lever in the turn the light switch to the OFF your headlights. Failure to do so could
cause an accident injuring yourself and
neutral position as shown. position when you leave the vehicle
for extended periods of time, other- others.
*
2 To select the high beam, push the lever wise the battery will be discharged.
forward while the switch is in the
position. Pull it back to select the low beam. . Never leave the light switch on
when the engine is not running for
*
3 Pulling the lever toward you will flash the extended periods of time even if the
headlight high beam even when the head- headlights turn off automatically.
light switch is in the OFF position.
Battery saver system Daytime running light system (Canada
A chime will sound when the driver side door is only)
opened with the light switch in the or The daytime running lights automatically illumi-
position and the ignition switch in the ACC, nate when the engine is started with the parking
OFF or LOCK position. brake released. The daytime running lights
2-34 Instruments and controls
Instrument brightness control TURN SIGNAL SWITCH FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)
The instrument brightness control operates
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
*
1 Turn signal To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight
Move the lever up or down to signal the turning switch to the position, then turn the switch
Pushing the control switch *A once will change direction. When the turn is completed, the turn to the position. To turn them off, turn the
the brightness to the night mode. signals cancel automatically. switch to the OFF position.
SIC2574 SIC3586
Push the switch on to warn other drivers when To sound the horn, push the pad area *
A of the
you must stop or park under emergency condi- steering wheel.
tions. All turn signal lights will flash.
WARNING
WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so
. If stopping for an emergency, be could affect proper operation of the
sure to move the vehicle well off the supplemental front air bag system.
road. Tampering with the supplemental front
. Do not use the hazard warning air bag system may result in serious
flashers while moving on the high- personal injury.
way unless unusual circumstances
force you to drive so slowly that
your vehicle might become a hazard
to other traffic.
2-36 Instruments and controls
CLOCK
3. To turn off the heater, return the switch to 5. Push the CLOCK button *
1 or AUDIO
the level position. Make sure the indicator knob *
2 to enter.
light goes off.
The display will return to the regular clock
The heater is controlled by a thermostat, display after 10 seconds.
automatically turning the heater on and off.
The indicator light will remain on as long as If the power supply is disconnected, the clock
the switch is on. will not indicate the correct time.
To use the power outlet, pull the cover as contact the outlet.
illustrated.
CAUTION
. The outlet and plug may be hot
during or immediately after use.
. Do not use with accessories that
exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power
draw. Do not use double adapters or
more than one electrical accessory.
. Use power outlet with the engine
running to avoid discharging the
SIC3588
vehicle battery.
. Avoid using power outlet when the To open the ashtray lid, push the lid down and
air conditioner, headlights or rear release it *
1 .
window defroster is on. To empty the ashtray, pull out *
2 .
. This power outlet is not designed
The cigarette lighter operates when the ignition
for use with a cigarette lighter unit. switch is in the ON position.
. Push the plug in as far as it will go.
Push the lighter in all the way *3 , then release
If good contact is not made, the plug
it. When the lighter is heated, it will spring out.
may overheat or the internal tem- Return the lighter to its original position after
perature fuse may open. use.
. Before inserting or disconnecting a
plug, be sure the electrical acces-
sory being used is turned OFF.
. When not in use, be sure to close
the cap. Do not allow water to
2-40 Instruments and controls
STORAGE
CUP HOLDERS
CAUTION
. The cigarette lighter socket is a CAUTION
power source for the cigarette light-
er element only. The use of the . Avoid abrupt starting and braking
cigarette lighter socket as a power when the cup holder is being used
source for any other accessory is to prevent spilling the drink. If the
not recommended. liquid is hot, it can scald you or your
passenger.
. Do not use any other power outlet
for an accessory lighter. . Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident.
SIC3118
Front
To open the cup holder, push the lid *
1 .
SIC3042 SIC3589
Rear
Pull the armrest forward until it is horizontal. SUNGLASSES HOLDER
WARNING
Keep the sunglasses holder closed
while driving to prevent an accident.
CAUTION
. Do not use for anything other than
glasses.
. Do not leave glasses in the sun-
glasses holder while parking in
2-42 Instruments and controls
SIC3590 SIC3654
Front
GLOVE BOX CONSOLE BOX
When the lever * A (driver’s seat side) is pulled,
WARNING the upper case is available for storing some
small items. When the lever * B (front passen-
Keep glove box lid closed while driving ger’s seat side) is pulled, the bottom case is
to help prevent injury in an accident or a available for storing some larger ones.
sudden stop.
SIC3656
Type B
2-44 Instruments and controls
The cargo floor box needs to be removed when LUGGAGE SIDE BOX
you need a spare tire. (See “FLAT TIRE” in the
“6. In case of emergency” section.) To open the luggage side box, pull up the strap.
CAUTION
To avoid damage, do not load more
than 22 lbs (10 kg) of cargo into the SIC3595
cargo floor box.
CARGO COVER (if so equipped)
The cargo cover keeps the contents in the cargo
area hidden from the outside.
To use the cargo cover, pull it out and hang both
sides on the hooks *1 .
To use the sub cover, hang the straps on the restraint top tether strap is da-
back of the headrest *
2 . maged.
To stow the cargo cover, remove it from the — If the cargo cover contacts the
hooks and hold until it is retracted. top tether strap when it is at-
To remove the cargo cover, stow the cover and tached to the top tether anchor,
pull the left side of the holder to the opposite remove the cargo cover from the
side * 3 . vehicle or secure it on the cargo
floor below its attachment loca-
WARNING tion. If the cargo cover is not
removed, it may damage the top
. Never put anything on the cargo tether strap during a collision.
cover, no matter how small. Any — Do not allow cargo to contact
object on it could cause an injury the top tether strap when it is
in an accident or sudden stop. attached to the top tether an-
. Close the cargo cover when folding chor. Properly secure the cargo
the rear seat. so it does not contact the top
tether strap. Cargo that is not
. Do not leave the cargo cover in the
properly secured or that con-
vehicle with it disengaged from the
tacts the top tether strap may
holder.
damage the top tether strap
. Properly secure all cargo with ropes during a collision.
or straps to help prevent it from SIC3596
sliding or shifting. Do not place
cargo higher than the seatbacks. In LUGGAGE HOOKS
a sudden stop or collision, unse-
cured cargo could cause personal WARNING
injury.
. Your child could be seriously injured . Always make sure that the cargo is
or killed in a collision if the child properly secured. Use the suitable
WINDOWS
SIC3283A SIC3241
Main power window switch (driver’s Passenger side power window switch
side) The passenger side switch will open or close
1. Driver side window only the corresponding window. To open or
2. Front passenger side window close the window, push down or pull up the
3. Rear left passenger side window switch and hold it.
4. Rear right passenger side window
5. Window lock button
To open or close the window, push down * A or
pull up * B the switch and hold it. The main
switch (driver side switches) will open or close
all the windows.
SIC3598
CAUTION
Sliding sunshade and moonroof
. Remove water drops, snow, ice or When the OPEN side * 1 of the moonroof
sand from the moonroof before switch is pushed, the front and rear sunshades
opening. will fully open. When the switch is pushed again,
. Do not place any heavy object on the moonroof will fully open.
the moonroof or surrounding area. When the CLOSE side * 2 of the moonroof
. Do not push or pull on the sun- switch is pushed, the moonroof will automati-
shade. Doing so can damage the cally close. Push the switch again, and the front
sunshade. and rear sunshades will close.
When the OPEN or CLOSE side of the moon-
roof switch is pushed to the second detent (*
3
or *4 ), both the sunshade and moonroof will
open or close.
To stop the sunshades or moonroof during the
Instruments and controls 2-51
INTERIOR LIGHTS
MOOD LIGHTS
HomeLink® UNIVERSAL
VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS CARGO LIGHTS
TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)
WARNING
. Do not use HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver with any garage door
opener that lacks safety stop and
Instruments and controls 2-55
PROGRAMMING HomeLink®
To program your HomeLink® Transceiver to
operate a garage door, gate, or entry door
opener, home or office lighting, you need to be
at the same location as the device. Note:
Garage door openers (manufactured after
2-56 Instruments and controls
button - releasing when the device begins to Push and release the HomeLink® button up
activate. to three times to complete the training.
5. If the indicator light on HomeLink® blinks 8. Your HomeLink® button should now be
rapidly for two seconds and then turns solid, programmed. To program the remaining
HomeLink® has picked up a “rolling code” HomeLink® buttons for additional door or
garage door opener signal. You will need to gate openers, follow steps 2 through 8 only.
proceed with the next steps to train Home-
Link®, completing the programming may NOTE:
require a ladder and another person for Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to
convenience. “clear” all previously programmed Home-
Link® buttons.
6. Push and release the program button
located on the garage door opener’s motor If you have any questions or are having difficulty
to activate the “training mode”. This button is programming your HomeLink® buttons, please
SIC3613 usually located near the antenna wire that refer to the HomeLink® web site at: www.
hangs down from the motor. If the wire homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.
3. Using both hands, simultaneously push and originates from under a light lens, you will
hold both the HomeLink® button you want to need to remove the lens to access the PROGRAMMING HomeLink® FOR CA-
program and the hand-held transmitter training button. NADIAN CUSTOMERS
button.
NOTE: Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required
DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has Once you have pushed and released hand-held transmitters to stop transmitting after
been completed. the training button on the garage door 2 seconds. To program your hand-held trans-
opener’s motor and the “training light” mitter to HomeLink®, continue to push and hold
4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator
is lit, you have 30 seconds in which to the HomeLink® button (note steps 2 through 4
light on HomeLink® flashes, changing from a
perform step 7. For convenience, use under “Programming HomeLink®”) while you
“slow blink” to a “rapid blink”. This could
the help of a second person to assist push and re-push (“cycle”) your hand-held
take up to 90 seconds. When the indicator
when performing this step. transmitter every 2 seconds until the indicator
light blinks rapidly, both buttons may be
light flashes rapidly (indicating successful pro-
released. The rapidly flashing light indicates 7. Quickly (within 30 seconds of pushing and gramming).
successful programming. To activate the releasing the garage door opener training
garage door or other programmed device, button) and firmly push and release the
push and hold the programmed HomeLink® HomeLink® button you’ve just programmed.
Instruments and controls 2-57
NOTE: (50 to 127 mm) away from the HomeLink® 3. Push and hold the hand-held transmitter
If programming a garage door opener, etc., surface. Hold the transmitter in that position button.
it is advised to unplug the device during for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink® is not
programmed within that time, try holding the 4. The HomeLink® indicator light will flash, first
the “cycling” process to prevent possible slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator
damage to the garage door opener com- transmitter in another position - keeping the
indicator light in view at all times. light begins to flash rapidly, release both
ponents. buttons.
If you continue to have programming difficulties,
OPERATING THE HomeLink® UNIVER- please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button has
SAL TRANSCEIVER Department. The phone numbers are located in now been reprogrammed. The new device can
be activated by pushing the HomeLink® button
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver (once pro- the Foreword of this Owner’s Manual.
that was just programmed. This procedure will
grammed) may now be used to activate the
CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED IN- not affect any other programmed HomeLink®
garage door, etc. To operate, simply push the
FORMATION buttons.
appropriate programmed HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver button. The red indicator light will Individual buttons cannot be cleared, however to IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN
illuminate while the signal is being transmitted. clear all programming, push and hold the two
If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the
outside buttons and release when the indicator
PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-DIAGNO- light begins to flash (in approximately 20
codes of any non-rolling code device that has
SIS been programmed into HomeLink®. Consult the
seconds).
Owner’s Manual of each device or call the
If HomeLink® does not quickly learn the hand- manufacturer or dealer of those devices for
held transmitter information: REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE Home-
Link® BUTTON additional information.
. replace the hand-held transmitter batteries When your vehicle is recovered, you will
with new batteries. To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal Transcei-
ver button, complete the following. need to reprogram the HomeLink® Univer-
. position the hand-held transmitter with its sal Transceiver with your new transmitter
battery area facing away from the Home- 1. Push and hold the desired HomeLink ® information.
Link® surface. button. Do not release the button until step
4 has been completed. FCC Notice:
. push and hold both the HomeLink® and This device complies with FCC rules part
hand-held transmitter buttons without inter- 2. When the indicator light begins to flash
slowly (after 20 seconds), position the 15. Operation is subject to the following
ruption. two conditions: (1) This device may not
hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 in (50 to 127
. position the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 in mm) away from the HomeLink® surface. cause harmful interference and (2) This
2-58 Instruments and controls
MEMO
KEYS
A key number plate is supplied with your keys. 1. Master key (2)
Record the key number and keep it in a safe 2. Mechanical key (inside the key) (2)
place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If 3. Key number plate (1)
you lose your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for
duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYS-
does not record any key numbers so it is very TEM KEYS
important to keep track of your key number plate. Your vehicle can only be driven with the master
A key number is only necessary when you have keys which are registered to the NISSAN
lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your
from. If you still have a key, this key can be vehicle. These keys have a transponder chip in
duplicated by a NISSAN dealer. the key head.
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
Additional or replacement keys:
SPA2406
Type A If you still have a key, the key number is not
necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can
duplicate your existing key. As many as 4 keys
can be used with one vehicle. You should bring
all the registered keys that you have to a
NISSAN dealer for registration. This is because
the registration process will erase the memory of
all key codes previously registered into the
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. After the
registration process, these components will only
recognize keys coded into the NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System during registration. Any key
that is not given to your dealer at the time of
registration will no longer be able to start your
vehicle.
SPA2431
Type B
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
ging it, please note the following. prevent the Intelligent Key from
CAUTION unauthorized use to unlock the
— The Intelligent Key is water
Do not allow the NISSAN Vehicle Im- resistant; however, wetting may vehicle. For information regarding
mobilizer System key, which contains damage the Intelligent Key. If the erasing procedure, please con-
an electrical transponder, to come in the Intelligent Key gets wet, tact a NISSAN dealer.
contact with salt water. This could immediately wipe until it is com-
cause the system to malfunction. pletely dry.
— Do not bend, drop or strike it
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM against another object.
Your vehicle can only be driven with the — Do not place the Intelligent Key
Intelligent Keys which are registered to your for an extended period in a
vehicle’s Intelligent Key system components and place where temperatures ex-
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System compo- ceed 1408F (608C).
nents. As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be — Do not change or modify the
registered and used with one vehicle. The new Intelligent Key.
keys must be registered by a NISSAN dealer
prior to use with the Intelligent Key system and — Do not use a magnet key holder.
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System of your — Do not place the Intelligent Key
vehicle. Since the registration process requires near an electric appliance such
erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key compo- as a television set, personal
nents when registering new keys, be sure to take computer or cellular phone.
all Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN — Do not allow the Intelligent Key
dealer.
to come into contact with water
or salt water, and do not wash it
CAUTION in a washing machine. This
could affect the system function.
. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
with you when driving. The Intelli- . If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,
gent Key is a precision device with a NISSAN recommends erasing the ID
built-in transmitter. To avoid dama- code of that Intelligent Key. This will
DOORS
CAUTION WARNING
Always carry the mechanical key in- . Always have the doors locked while
stalled in the key. driving. Along with the use of seat
belts, this provides greater safety in
VALET HAND-OFF the event of an accident by helping
When you have to leave a key with a valet, give to prevent persons from being
them the Intelligent Key itself after removing the thrown from the vehicle. This also
mechanical key to protect your belongings. helps keep children and others from
unintentionally opening the doors,
To prevent the glove box from being opened
and will help keep out intruders.
during valet hand-off, follow the procedures
below. . Before opening any door, always
SPA2033 look for and avoid oncoming traffic.
1. Remove the mechanical key from the In-
telligent Key. . Do not leave children unattended
MECHANICAL KEY
inside the vehicle. They could un-
To remove the mechanical key, release the lock 2. Lock the glove box with the mechanical key. knowingly activate switches or con-
knob at the back of the key. 3. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet, keeping trols. Unattended children could
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into the mechanical key in your pocket or bag. become involved in serious acci-
the key until the lock knob returns to the lock Insert the mechanical key into the Intelligent dents.
position. Key when you retrieve your vehicle.
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the For glove box lock, see “STORAGE” in the “2.
doors and glove box, if they are equipped with a Instruments and controls” section.
key cylinder.
See “DOORS” later in this section and “STO-
RAGE” in the “2. Instruments and controls”
section.
. Turning the driver’s door key cylinder once When locking the door without Intelligent
to the rear of the vehicle *2 will unlock the Key, be sure not to leave the Intelligent
driver’s door. After returning the key to the Key inside the vehicle.
neutral position * 3 , turning it to the rear
again within 1 minute will unlock all doors.
. You can switch the lock system to the mode
that allows you to open all the doors when
the key is turned once. (See “HOW TO USE
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5
WARNING CAUTION
. Radio waves could adversely affect . Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
electric medical equipment. Those with you when operating the vehi-
who use a pacemaker should con- cle.
tact the electric medical equipment . Never leave the Intelligent Key in
manufacturer for the possible influ- the vehicle when you leave the
ences before use. vehicle.
. The Intelligent Key transmits radio
waves when the buttons are The Intelligent Key is always communicating with
pushed. The FAA advises that radio the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The
waves may affect aircraft navigation Intelligent Key system transmits weak radio
waves. Environmental conditions may interfere
SPA2433 and communication systems. Do not
with the operation of the Intelligent Key system
operate the Intelligent Key while on under the following operating conditions.
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK an airplane. Make sure the buttons
The child safety rear door lock helps prevent are not operated unintentionally . When operating near a location where
doors from being opened accidentally, espe- when the unit is stored for a flight. strong radio waves are transmitted, such
cially when small children are in the vehicle. as a TV tower, power station and broad-
The Intelligent Key system can operate all the casting station.
When the levers are in the lock position door locks using the remote controller function .
*1 , the rear doors can be opened only or pushing the request switch on the vehicle
When in possession of wireless equipment,
such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,
from the outside. without taking the key out from a pocket or and CB radio.
To disengage, move the levers to the unlock purse. The operating environment and/or condi-
position *
2 . tions may affect the Intelligent Key system . When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or
operation. covered by metallic materials.
Be sure to read the following before using the . When any type of radio wave remote control
Intelligent Key system. is used nearby.
. When the Intelligent Key is placed near an
electric appliance such as a personal
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7
SPA2408 SPA2434
SPA2435
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you *3: Doors will not lock by pushing the door Inserting the Intelligent Key into the Intelligent
can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key port
handle request switch * A or the lift gate Key inside the vehicle.
request switch * B within the range of opera- However, when an Intelligent Key is inside Power lift gate open (if so equipped)
tion. the vehicle, doors can be locked with 1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
another registered Intelligent Key.
When you lock or unlock the doors or the lift 2. Push the power lift gate opener switch *
C .
gate, the hazard indicator will flash and the horn Unlocking doors 3. The lift gate will unlock and automatically
(or the outside chime) will sound as a confirma- 1. Push the door handle request switch * A or open.
tion. For details, see “Setting hazard indicator the lift gate request switch *B once while
and horn mode” later in this section. carrying the Intelligent Key with you. 4. The hazard indicator flashes 4 times and the
outside chime sounds.
Locking doors 2. The hazard indicator flashes once and the
1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) outside chime sounds once. The corre- To close the lift gate, push the power lift gate
position, push the ignition switch to the OFF sponding door or the lift gate will unlock. button on the key, or power lift gate switch on
position and make sure you carry the the instrument panel or lower part of the lift gate.
Intelligent Key with you.*1 3. Push the request switch again within 1 (See “LIFT GATE” in the “3. Pre-driving checks
minute. and adjustments” section.)
2. Close all the doors.*2
4. The hazard indicator flashes once and the Setting hazard indicator and horn mode
3. Push the door handle request switch *A or outside chime sounds once again. All the
lift gate request switch * B while carrying doors and the lift gate will unlock. This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and horn
the Intelligent Key with you.*3 mode when you first receive the vehicle.
All doors will be locked automatically unless one
4. All the doors and the lift gate will lock. of the following operations is performed within 1 In hazard indicator and horn mode, when the
minute after pushing the request switch while LOCK button * 1 is pushed, the hazard
5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the the doors are locked. If during this 1-minute time indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once.
outside chime sounds twice. period, the request switch is pushed, all doors When the UNLOCK button *2 is pushed,
will be locked automatically after another 1 the hazard indicator flashes once.
*1: Doors will lock with the Intelligent Key while
the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON minute. If horns are not necessary, the system can be
position. . Opening any door switched to the hazard indicator mode.
*2: Doors will not lock with the Intelligent Key . Pushing the ignition switch In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCK
while any door is open. button is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11
twice. When the UNLOCK button is Hazard indicator and horn mode:
pushed, neither the hazard indicator nor the
horn operates. DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK
Intelligent Key system HAZARD - twice HAZARD - once
(Using door handle or lift gate request switch) OUTSIDE CHIME - twice OUTSIDE CHIME - once
Remote keyless entry system
HAZARD - twice HAZARD - once
(Using or button) HORN - once HORN - none
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Symptom Possible cause Action to take
The SHIFT P warning appears on the display
When pushing the ignition switch The selector lever is not in the P (Park) Shift the selector lever to the P (Park)
and the inside warning chime sounds con-
to stop the engine position. position.
tinuously.
When shifting the selector lever The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-
The inside warning chime sounds continuously.
to the P (Park) position. position. tion.
The ignition switch is in the ACC Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-
When opening the driver’s door position. tion.
The inside warning chime sounds continuously.
to get out of the vehicle The Intelligent Key is in the Intelligent Remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelli-
Key port. gent Key port.
The NO KEY warning appears on the display,
the outside chime sounds 3 times and the The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-
inside warning chime sounds for a few position. tion.
When closing the door after get- seconds.
ting out of the vehicle
The ignition switch is in the ACC or OFF Move the selector lever to the P (Park)
The SHIFT P warning appears on the display
position and the selector lever is not in position and push the ignition switch to the
and the outside chime sounds continuously.
the P (Park) position. OFF position.
When closing the door with the The outside chime sounds for a few seconds
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
inside lock knob turned to LOCK and all the doors unlock.
When pushing the request switch The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
or the LOCK button on the The outside chime sounds for a few seconds.
Intelligent Key to lock the door A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely.
discharged.
WARNING After locking with the remote keyless entry
The Intelligent Key transmits radio function, pull the door handle to make sure the
waves when the buttons are pushed. doors are securely locked.
The FAA advises that radio waves may The LOCK/UNLOCK operating range varies
affect aircraft navigation and commu- depending on the environment. To securely
nication systems. Do not operate the operate the lock and unlock buttons, approach
Intelligent Key while on an airplane. the vehicle to about 3 ft (1 m) from the door.
Make sure the buttons are not operated
unintentionally when the unit is stored
for a flight.
*
1 LOCK button
Unlocking doors The door windows can be opened or closed by
*
2 UNLOCK button
1. Push the UNLOCK button * once. turning the mechanical key in a door lock. (See
*
2
3 Power lift gate button (if so equipped) “DOORS” earlier in this section.)
*
4 PANIC button 2. The hazard indicator flashes once. The
Opening/closing lift gate (if so equipped)
driver’s door will unlock.
HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS 1. Push the power lift gate button *
3
ENTRY SYSTEM 3. Push the UNLOCK button again within for more than 1 second.
1 minute.
When you lock or unlock the doors or the lift 2. The lift gate will automatically open.
gate, the hazard indicator will flash and the horn 4. The hazard indicator flashes once again. All
(or the outside chime) will sound as a confirma- the doors and the lift gate will unlock. The hazard indicator flashes 5 times and the
tion. For details, see “Setting hazard indicator outside chime sounds for approximately 3
and horn mode” later in this section. All doors will be locked automatically unless one seconds.
of the following operations is performed within 1
Locking doors minute after pushing the UNLOCK button while To close the lift gate, push the power lift gate
1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) the doors are locked. If during this 1-minute time button * 3 .
position and push the ignition switch to the period, the UNLOCK button is pushed, all doors
will be locked automatically after another 1 The lift gate will automatically close.
OFF position. Make sure you carry the
Intelligent Key with you.*1 minute. If the button *3 is pushed while the lift
. Opening any door gate is being opened or closed, the lift gate will
2. Close all the doors and lift gate.*2 reverse.
* . Pushing the ignition switch
3. Push the LOCK button 1 . The power lift gate button *3 cannot be
4. All the doors and the lift gate will lock. Opening windows operated when the ignition switch is in the ON
To open the windows, push the door UNLOCK position.
button *
5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the 2 for about 3 seconds after the
horn chirps once. Using panic alarm
door is unlocked.
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,
*1: Doors will lock while the ignition switch is in you can activate the alarm according to the
To stop opening, release the UNLOCK
the ACC or ON position. following procedure to call attention.
button.
*2: Doors will not lock while any door is open.
Windows cannot be closed using the button on 1. Push the PANIC button *
4 for more
the Intelligent Key. than 1 second.
2. The theft warning alarm will sound and the Hazard indicator and horn mode:
headlights will flash for 25 seconds.
DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK
3. The panic alarm stops under either of the
Intelligent Key system
following conditions. HAZARD - twice HAZARD - once
(Using door handle or lift gate request switch) OUTSIDE CHIME - twice OUTSIDE CHIME - once
. It has run for 25 seconds, or Remote keyless entry system
HAZARD - twice HAZARD - once
(Using or button)
. Any of the buttons is pushed. (Note: the HORN - once HORN - none
HOOD
Switching procedure:
Push the LOCK *1 and UNLOCK *2
buttons simultaneously for more than 2 seconds
to switch the mode from one to the other.
When pushing the buttons to set the hazard
indicator mode, the hazard indicator flashes 3
times.
When pushing the buttons to set the hazard
indicator and horn mode, the hazard indicator
flashes once and the horn chirps once.
SPA2437
LIFT GATE
. Always be sure that hands and feet The lift gate can be unlocked by:
are clear of the door frame to avoid
. pushing the unlock button on the
injury while closing the lift gate.
Intelligent Key twice.
. pushing the lift gate request switch (if so
equipped).
. pushing the door handle request switch
twice (if so equipped).
. pushing the power door lock switch to the
unlock position.
SPA2462 SPA2440
Power open the Intelligent Key for more than 1 second motion will stop and the drive motor will
When the lift gate is fully closed, the lift gate will disengage. The lift gate will enter the manual
The hazard flashes 4 times and the outside mode.
fully open automatically by: chime sounds when the lift gate starts closing.
. pushing the power lift gate switch *
A on Reverse function
A pinch sensor is mounted on each side of the
lift gate. If an obstacle is detected by the pinch
the instrument panel
The power lift gate will reverse immediately if sensor during power close, the lift gate will
. pushing the lift gate opener switch *B one of the following actions is performed during reverse and return to the full open position
power open or power close. immediately.
. pushing the power lift gate button *on
C
the Intelligent Key for more than 1 second . pushing the power lift gate switch *
A on NOTE:
the instrument panel If the pinch sensor is damaged or removed,
The hazard flashes 4 times and the outside
chime sounds when the lift gate starts opening. . pushing the lift gate switch *
D on the lower the power close function will not operate.
part of the lift gate
NOTE:
. pushing the lift gate button *
C on
WARNING
The lift gate can be opened by the power
lift gate switch *
A or the lift gate button the Intelligent Key. There is a small distance immediately
*C even if the lift gate is locked. The outside chime sounds when the lift gate before the closed position that cannot
The lift gate will individually unlock and starts to reverse. be detected. Make sure that all passen-
open. Once the lift gate is closed, its lock gers keep their hands, etc., clear from
will align to the vehicle’s lock or unlock The power lift gate button * C on the
the lift gate opening before closing the
status. Intelligent Key cannot be operated when the
ignition switch is in the ON position. lift gate.
Power close
Auto reverse function Manual mode
When the lift gate is fully opened, the lift gate
will fully close automatically by: The auto-reverse function enables the lift gate to If power operation is not available, the lift gate
automatically reverse when something is caught can be operated manually. Power operation may
. pushing the power lift gate switch *
A on in the lift gate as it is opening or closing. When not be available if multiple obstacles have been
the instrument panel the control unit detects an obstacle, the lift gate detected in a single power cycle or if the battery
voltage is low. When the power lift gate main
. pushing the power lift gate switch *
D on will reverse and return to the full open or full
close position. switch is in the OFF position, the lift gate can be
the lower part of the lift gate
opened manually by pushing the lift gate opener
. pushing the lift gate release button *
C on If a second obstacle is detected, the lift gate switch. If the power lift gate opener switch is
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21
FUEL-FILLER DOOR
SPA1915 SPA2441
TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING
WARNING
. Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving. You could lose control
of your vehicle and cause an acci-
dent.
. Do not adjust the steering wheel
any closer to you than is necessary
for proper steering operation and
comfort. The driver’s air bag inflates
with great force. If you are unrest-
rained, leaning forward, sitting side-
SPA2442 ways or out of position in any way, SPA2443
you are at greater risk of injury or
The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn the death in a crash. You may also MANUAL OPERATION
cap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turn
receive serious or fatal injuries from Tilt or telescopic operation
the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are
the air bag if you are up against it
heard. Pull the lock lever *
1 down and adjust the
when it inflates. Always sit back
Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder *
A against the seatback and as far
steering wheel forward or rearward to the
desired position.
while refueling. away as practical from the steering
wheel. Always use the seat belts. Push the lock lever up securely to lock the
steering wheel in place.
Pull the lock lever *
2 and adjust the steering
wheel up or down to the desired position.
Release the lock lever to lock the steering wheel
in place.
SUN VISORS
SPA2444A
ELECTRIC OPERATION
Tilt or telescopic operation
Move the lever to adjust the steering wheel up or
down, forward or rearward to the desired
position.
Entry/Exit function operation (if so
equipped):
The automatic drive positioner system will make
the steering wheel move up automatically when
the driver’s door is opened with the ignition
switch in the LOCK position. This lets the driver
get into and out of the seat more easily.
For more information, see “AUTOMATIC DRIVE SIC3451
MIRRORS
CAUTION
. Do not store the main sun visor
before storing the extension sun
visor.
. Do not pull the extension sun visor
forcedly downward.
WARNING
Use the night position only when ne-
cessary, because it reduces rear view
clarity.
SPA2319 SPA1829
The automatic drive positioner system has two canceled by pressing and holding the SET
features: switch for more than 10 seconds.
. Entry/exit function The indicator lights on the memory switches (1
and 2) will blink once when the function is
. Memory storage
canceled, and the indicator lights will blink twice
ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION when the function is activated. Note that the
indicator lights may illuminate after 5 seconds
This system is designed so that the driver’s seat while holding the SET switch. This indicates
and steering column will automatically move readiness for linking the Intelligent Key to a
when the selector lever is in the P (Park) stored memory position. Keep the SET switch
position. This allows the driver to get into and pressed for more than 10 seconds to turn on or
out of the driver’s seat more easily. off the entry/exit function.
The driver’s seat will slide backward and the The entry/exit function can also be activated or
SIC2064 steering wheel will move up when the driver’s canceled if the “Lift Steering Wheel on Exit” key
door is opened with the ignition switch in the or “Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit” key is turned
VANITY MIRROR LOCK position and the Intelligent Key not to ON or OFF in the “Comfort & Conv.” settings.
inserted in the Intelligent Key port. (See “VEHICLE INFORMATION AND SET-
To use the front vanity mirror, pull down the sun
visor and pull up the cover. TINGS” in the “4. Monitor, heater, air condi-
The driver’s seat and steering wheel will return
tioner, audio, phone and voice recognition
to the previous positions when the ignition
systems” section.)
switch is pushed to the ACC position.
The driver’s seat will not return to the previous Initialize entry/exit function
positions if the seat or steering adjusting switch If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
is operated when the seat is at the exit position. opens, the entry/exit function will not work
though this function was set on before. In such
Cancel or activate entry/exit function a case, after connecting the battery or replacing
The selector lever must be in the P (Park) with a new fuse, open and close the driver’s
position with the ignition switch in the OFF door more than two times after the ignition
position. switch is turned from the ON position to the
LOCK position. The entry/exit function will be
The entry/exit function can be activated or activated.
3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
“TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING” earlier in Push the ignition switch to the OFF position, and
this section and “OUTSIDE MIRRORS” then push the button on the Intelligent Key.
earlier in this section. The driver’s seat, steering wheel and outside
mirrors will move to the memorized position.
4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds,
push the memory switch (1 or 2). Confirming memory storage
The indicator light for the pushed memory . Push the ignition switch to the ON position
switch will stay on for approximately 5 and push the SET switch. If the main
seconds after pushing the switch. memory has not been stored, the indicator
light will come on for approximately 0.5
If memory is stored in the same memory second. When the memory has stored in
switch, the previous memory will be deleted. position, the indicator light will stay on for
approximately 5 seconds.
Linking Intelligent Key to a stored mem-
ory position . If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the
SPA2445
The Intelligent Key can be linked to a stored fuse opens, the memory will be canceled. In
MEMORY STORAGE memory position with the following procedure. this case, reset the desired position using
the previous procedure.
Two positions for the driver’s seat, steering 1. Follow one of the steps for storing a memory
column and outside mirrors can be stored in the position. . If optional keys are added to your vehicle,
automatic drive positioner memory. Follow these the memory storage procedure to switch 1
procedures to use the memory system. . While the indicator light for the memory or 2 and linking Intelligent Key procedure to
switch being set is illuminated for 5 sec- a stored memory position should be per-
1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) onds, push the button on the Intelligent formed again for each Intelligent Key. For
position. Key. additional Intelligent Key information, see
“KEYS” earlier in this section.
2. Push the ignition switch to the ON position. . Push the ignition switch to the OFF position,
and then push the SET switch. Push the Selecting the memorized position
3. Adjust the driver’s seat, steering column and button while pushing the memory
outside mirrors to the desired positions by 1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)
button while the indicator light stays on for position.
manually operating each adjusting switch. approximately 5 seconds.
For additional information, see “SEATS” in 2. Use one of the following methods to move
the “1. Safety — Seats, seat belts and If the indicator light blinks, the Intelligent Key is the driver’s seat, the outside mirrors and the
supplemental restraint system” section and linked to that memory setting. steering wheel.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31
. Push the ignition switch to the ON . When the engine is started while moving the
position and push the memory switch automatic drive positioner.
(1 or 2).
. When the selector lever is moved from the P
. Within 45 seconds of opening the (Park) position to any other position. (How-
driver’s door, push the memory switch ever, it will not be canceled while the seat
(1 or 2). and steering column are returning to the
previous positions (entry/exit function).)
The driver’s seat, steering column and
outside mirrors will move to the memorized . When the driver’s door remains open for
position with the indicator light flashing, and more than 45 seconds and the ignition
then the light will stay on for approximately 5 switch is not in the ON position.
seconds.
SYSTEM OPERATION
The automatic drive positioner system will not
work or will stop operating under the following
conditions:
. When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7
km/h) (entry/exit function).
. When the vehicle is driven (memory sto-
rage).
. When the adjusting switch for the driver’s
seat and steering column is turned on while
the automatic drive positioner is operating.
. When the seat, steering column and outside
mirrors have already been moved to the
memorized position.
. When no position is stored in the memory
switch.
3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
MEMO
CENTER MULTI-FUNCTION
SAFETY NOTE CONTROL PANEL (models with
color display screen)
WARNING
. Do not disassemble or modify this
system. If you do, it may result in
accidents, fire, or electric shock.
. Do not use this system if you notice
any abnormality, such as a frozen
screen or lack of sound. Continued
use of the system may result in
accident, fire or electric shock.
. In case you notice any foreign
object in the system hardware, spill
liquid on it, or notice smoke or smell SAA1845
coming from it, stop using the With navigation system
1. “STATUS” status display button (P.4-8)
system immediately and contact
2, 6, 7, 8, 9.
your nearest NISSAN dealer. Ignor- For navigation system control buttons (Refer to the
ing such conditions may lead to separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.)
accidents, fire, or electric shock. 3. Multi-function controller (P.4-4)
. Park the vehicle in a safe location 4. “PHONE” Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-
and apply the parking brake to view tem button (P.4-75)
the images on the front center dis- 5. “ OFF” brightness control and display ON/
OFF button (P.4-8)
play screen using devices connected
10. “INFO” vehicle and navigation information button
to the auxiliary input jacks.
(P.4-8)
Do not attempt to operate the system in 11. “SETTING” button (P.4-12)
extreme temperature conditions [below
−48F (−208C) and above 1588F (708C)].
Operating this system under these condi-
tions may result in system malfunctions.
4-2 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
SAA1846 SAA1847
Without navigation system With navigation system
1. “INFO” vehicle information button (P.4-8) When you use this system, make sure the
2. “STATUS” status display button (P.4-8) engine is running.
3. Multi-function controller (P.4-4)
If you use the system with the engine not
4. “ OFF” brightness control and display ON/ running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long
OFF button (P.4-8)
time, it will use up all the battery power,
5. “SETTING” button (P.4-12)
and the engine will not start.
SAA1848
Without navigation system
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3
. Space:
Inserts a space.
. Delete:
Deletes the last character that has been
input with one touch. Push and hold the
button to delete all of the characters.
. OK:
Completes character inputs.
Touch screen maintenance
If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft
SAA1543 SAA1617 cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a
small amount of neutral detergent with a soft
Adjusting the item: Inputting characters: cloth. Never spray the screen with water or
detergent. Dampen the cloth first, and then wipe
Touch the + *
1 or − *
2 button to adjust the Touch the letter or number *
1 . the screen.
settings.
There are some options available when inputting
Touch the UP * 3 or DOWN * 4 button to characters.
move to the previous or next page.
. Uppercase:
Shows uppercase characters.
. Lowercase:
Shows lowercase characters.
. Symbols:
Shows symbols such as the question mark
(?).
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5
START-UP SCREEN (models with navi- START MENU (models with navigation Available items
gation system) system) Destination/Route:
When you push the ignition switch to the ACC The start menu can be displayed using the
These items are for the navigation system. If your
or ON position, the SYSTEM START-UP warn- ENTER switch on the steering-wheel-mounted
vehicle is equipped with the navigation system,
ing is displayed on the screen. When you read controls.
see the separate Navigation System Owner’s
and agree with the warning, push the ENTER
1. While the map (if so equipped) or status Manual for details.
button.
screen is displayed, push and hold the
If you do not push the ENTER button, you will ENTER switch until the “Menu Options” Information:
not be able to use the NAVI system. screen appears. Displays the information screen. It is the same
screen that appears when you push the INFO
To proceed to the NAVI system, refer to the 2. Highlight the preferred item tilting the
button.
separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual. ENTER switch up or down, and then push
the ENTER switch. Settings:
Displays the settings screen. It is the same
screen that appears when you push the SET-
4-6 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7
HOW TO USE STATUS BUTTON The information shown on the screen should be
a guide to determine the condition of the vehicle.
To display the status of the audio, climate control See the following for details.
system, fuel consumption and navigation system
(if so equipped), push the STATUS button. The
following information will appear when the
STATUS button is pushed.
Audio ? Audio and Climate control system ?
Audio and fuel consumption ? Audio and
Navigation system (if so equipped) ? Audio
HOW TO USE BRIGHTNESS CON-
TROL AND DISPLAY ON/OFF BUTTON
Push the “ OFF” button to switch the
SAA1545
display brightness to the daytime mode or the With navigation system
nighttime mode, and to adjust the display
brightness using the multi-function controller
while the indicator is displayed at the bottom of
the screen.
The display brightness can also be adjusted
using the brightness UP button (+) or bright-
ness DOWN button (−).
Push and hold the “ OFF” button for more
than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Push the
button again to turn the display on.
HOW TO USE INFO BUTTON
The display screen shows vehicle and navigation
(if so equipped) information for your conveni-
SAA1511
ence. Without navigation system
4-8 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
SAA1547
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9
SAA1554 SAA1555
4-10 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
SAA1611 SAA1592
SAA1556
With navigation system
SAA1514
Without navigation system
4-12 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
SAA1557 SAA1813
With navigation system
Audio settings Display settings
The above display will appear when pushing the The above display will appear when pushing the
SETTING button, selecting the “Audio” key SETTING button, selecting “Display” key with
with the multi-function controller and pushing the multi-function controller and pushing the
the ENTER button. ENTER button.
Bass/Treble/Balance/Fade: Display:
To adjust the speaker tone quality and sound To turn off the screen, push the ENTER button
balance, select the “Bass”, “Treble”, “Bal- and turn the “Display” indicator off. The other
ance” or “Fade” key and adjust it with the method is to push and hold the “ OFF”
multi-function controller. button for more than 2 seconds.
These items can also be adjusted by pushing When any mode button is pushed with the
and turning the AUDIO knob. screen off, the screen turns on for further
operation. The screen will turn off automatically
5 seconds after the operation is finished.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13
To turn on the screen, set this item to the ON using the remote controller. (See “NISSAN
position, or push the “ OFF” button. MOBILE ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (MES)”
later in this section.)
Brightness/Contrast/Background Color:
To adjust the brightness and contrast of the
screen, select the “Brightness” or “Contrast”
key and push the ENTER button.
Then, you can adjust the brightness to “Darker”
or “Brighter”, and the contrast to “Lower” or
“Higher” using the multi-function controller.
For information on the “Background Color”
key, refer to the separate Navigation System
Owner’s Manual.
SAA1814
Navigation settings (models with navi-
gation system) Rear Display settings (if so equipped)
For the details of “Navigation” settings, refer to The above display will appear when pushing the
the separate Navigation System Owner’s Man- SETTING button, selecting the “Rear Display”
ual. key with the multi-function controller and push-
ing the ENTER button.
Rear Display:
To open the rear display, push the ENTER
button. The rear display is flipped down auto-
matically. To close the rear display, push the
ENTER button and turn the “OK” indicator off.
The rear display will be closed automatically
when the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF
position.
The rear display can be also opened or closed
4-14 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
4-16 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
When this item is turned to ON, the interior Lift Steering Wheel on Exit (if so
lights will illuminate if any door is unlocked. equipped):
Auto Headlights Sensitivity (if so When this item is turned to ON, the steering
SAA1564 equipped): wheel moves upward for easy exit if the ignition
switch is in the OFF position and the driver’s
Adjust the sensitivity of the automatic headlights door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and
higher (right) or lower (left). pushing the ignition switch to the ACC position,
the steering wheel moves to the previous
Auto Headlights Off Delay (if so equipped):
position.
Choose the duration of the automatic headlight
off timer from 0, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 150 and Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit (if so
180 second periods. equipped):
Selective Door Unlock: When this item is turned to ON, the driver’s seat
moves backward for easy exit if the ignition
When this item is turned to ON, only the driver’s switch is in the OFF position and the driver’s
door is unlocked first after the door unlock door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and
operation. When the door handle request switch pushing the ignition switch to the ACC position,
on the driver’s or front passenger’s side door is the driver’s seat moves to the previous position.
pushed to be unlocked, only the corresponding
SAA1565 door is unlocked first. All the doors can be
unlocked if the door unlock operation is per-
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17
4-18 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
WARNING
. The rear view camera is a conve-
SAA1092 nience but it is not a substitute for
proper backing up. Always turn and
Language/Units settings (models without check that it is safe to do so before
navigation system) backing up. Always back up slowly.
The Language/Units settings display will appear . Objects viewed in the RearView
when pushing the SETTING button, selecting Monitor differ from actual distance
the “Language/Units” key with the multi- because a wide-angle lens is used.
function controller and pushing the ENTER Objects in the RearView Monitor
button.
will appear visually opposite than
Select Language: when viewed in the rear view and
outside mirrors.
Choose the “Select Language” key and push
the ENTER button. From the following display, . Make sure that the lift gate is
select “English”, “Français” or “Español” for your securely closed when backing up.
favorite display appearance. . Underneath the bumper and the
corner areas of the bumper cannot
be viewed on the RearView Monitor
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19
installed above the license plate. Indicate the predicted course when backing up.
. When washing the vehicle with The predicted course lines will be displayed on
the monitor when the selector lever is in the R
high-pressure water, be sure not to
(Reverse) position and the steering wheel is
spray it around the camera. Other- turned. The predicted course lines will move
wise, water may enter the camera depending on how much the steering wheel is
unit causing water condensation on turned and will not be displayed while the
the lens, a malfunction, fire or an steering wheel is in the neutral position.
electric shock.
HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED
. Do not strike the camera. It is a SAA1896
COURSE LINES
precision instrument. Otherwise, it
may malfunction or cause damage HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
resulting in a fire or an electric LINES WARNING
shock. Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width
and distances to objects with reference to the . Always turn and check that it is safe
vehicle body line *A are displayed on the to do so before backing up. Always
CAUTION monitor. back up slowly.
4-20 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
SAA1898 SAA1978
4-22 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
any object on the hill is viewed in the monitor any object on the hill is viewed in the monitor
further than it appears. closer than it appears.
SAA1979
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23
course.
HOW TO ADJUST THE SCREEN
To adjust the Display ON/OFF, Brightness, Tint,
Color, Contrast and Black Level of the RearView
Monitor, push the SETTING button with the
RearView Monitor on, select the item key and
adjust the level using the multi-function con-
troller.
Do not adjust the Brightness, Tint, Color,
Contrast and Black Level of the RearView
Monitor while the vehicle is moving. Make sure
the parking brake is firmly applied and the
engine is not running.
OPERATING TIPS
. When the selector lever is shifted to the R
(Reverse) position, the monitor screen auto-
matically changes to the RearView Monitor
mode. However, the radio can be heard.
. It may take some time until the RearView
SAA1923 SAA1980
Monitor or the normal screen is displayed
after the selector lever has been shifted to R
Backing up near a projecting object Backing up behind a projecting object from another position or to another position
The predicted course lines * The position *
A do not touch the
from R. Objects may be distorted momenta-
C is shown further than the
position *
rily until the RearView Monitor screen is
object in the display. However, the vehicle may B in the display. However, the
position *
displayed completely.
hit the object if it projects over the actual C is actually at the same distance
backing up course. as the position * A . The vehicle may hit the . When the temperature is extremely high or
object when backing up to the position * A if low, the screen may not clearly display
the object projects over the actual backing up objects. This is not a malfunction.
4-24 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
VENTILATORS
WARNING
. The air conditioner cooling function
operates only when the engine is
running.
. Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the support
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should not be left alone either. On
hot, sunny days, temperatures in a
closed vehicle could quickly become
high enough to cause severe or
SAA1066 possibly fatal injuries to people or SAA1520
Rear (if so equipped) animals.
For the models with the color display screen,
Open or close, and adjust the air flow direction . Do not use the recirculation mode push the “STATUS” button to display the heater
of ventilators. for long periods as it may cause the and air conditioner status screen. (See “HOW
: This symbol indicates that the vents are interior air to become stale and the TO USE STATUS BUTTON” earlier in this
closed. windows to fog up. section.)
: This symbol indicates that the vents are Start the engine and operate the heater and air
open. conditioner system.
You can individually set the driver and front
passenger side temperature using each tem-
perature control button.
4-26 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
SAA2040
Type A
1. Temperature control button (driver side)
2. “AUTO” automatic climate control ON button
3. “ ” front defroster button
4. “ ” fan speed control dial/OFF button
5. “ ” intake air control button
6. “MODE” manual air flow control button
7. Temperature control button (passenger side)
8. “A/C” air conditioner ON/OFF button
9. “ ” rear window defroster button (See “REAR
WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR DEFROS-
TER SWITCH” in the “2. Instruments and con-
trols” section.)
10. “ ” upper vent system button
11. “DUAL” zone control ON/OFF button
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27
4-28 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
. The temperature of the passenger compart- compartment to improve the defogging about 2 seconds. The indicator lights will flash
ment will be maintained automatically. Air performance. twice, and then the intake air will be controlled
flow distribution and fan speed are also automatically.
controlled automatically. MANUAL OPERATION
Air flow control
. Do not set the temperature lower than the Fan speed control Pushing the “MODE” manual air flow control
outside air temperature. Otherwise the Turn the “ ” fan speed control dial to button selects the air outlet to:
system may not work properly. manually control the fan speed.
: Air flows from center and side ventila-
. Not recommended if windows fog up. Push the “AUTO” button to return to automatic tors.
control of the fan speed.
Dehumidified defrosting or defogging : Air flows from center and side ventila-
1. Push the “ ” front defroster button. (The Air recirculation tors and foot outlets.
indicator light on the button will come on.) Push the intake air control button “ ” to : Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
2. Operate the temperature control buttons recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. The
(type A) dial (type B) to set the desired indicator light “ ” will come on. : Air flows from defroster and foot out-
temperature. lets.
The air recirculation mode cannot be activated
when the air conditioner is in the front defrosting Upper vent system
. To quickly remove ice from the outside of the
windows, turn the “ ” fan speed control mode “ ”. When the “ ” upper vent button is pushed,
dial and set it to the maximum position. the air flow against the driver’s or passenger’s
Outside air circulation upper body becomes gentle. The indicator light
. As soon as possible after the windshield is Push the intake air control button “ ” to on the button will come on.
clean, push the “AUTO” button to return to change the air circulation from the intake air to
the auto mode. the outside air. The indicator light “ ” will turn In this mode, air from the center ventilators flows
off. both straight and upward in order to control the
. When the “ ” front defroster button is cabin temperature without blowing air directly
pushed, the air conditioner will automatically Automatic air intake control on the occupants.
be turned on at outside temperatures above In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be
238F (−58C) to defog the windshield, and If you want strong air flow against your upper
controlled automatically. To manually control body, push the “ ” button to turn the
the air recirculate mode will automatically be the intake air, push the intake air control button
turned off. indicator light off.
“ ”. To return to the automatic control mode,
Outside air is drawn into the passenger push the intake air control button “ ” for
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29
TO TURN THE SYSTEM ON/OFF The filter should be replaced if air flow is
extremely decreased or when windows fog
Push the “OFF” or “ON·OFF” button when the
up easily when operating heater or air
heater and air conditioner is off. The system will
conditioning system.
turn on with the settings that were used
immediately before the system was turned off. SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER
The air conditioning system in your NISSAN is
charged with a refrigerant designed with the
environment in mind. This refrigerant will not
harm the earth’s ozone layer. However,
special charging equipment and lubricant are
required when servicing your NISSAN air con-
ditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubri-
cants will cause severe damage to your air
SAA1989 conditioning system. (See “CAPACITIES AND
RECOMMENDED FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the
OPERATING TIPS “9. Technical and consumer information” section
The sunload sensor * A on the instrument panel for air conditioning system refrigerant and
helps maintain a constant temperature. Do not lubricant recommendations.)
put anything on or around this sensor. Your NISSAN dealer will be able to service your
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER environmentally friendly air conditioning system.
4-30 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
AUDIO SYSTEM
Static and flutter: During signal interference from Satellite radio reception (if so equipped):
buildings, large hills or due to antenna position,
usually in conjunction with increased distance When the satellite radio is first installed or the
from the station transmitter, static or flutter can battery has been replaced, the satellite radio
be heard. This can be reduced by lowering the may not work properly. This is not a malfunction.
treble setting to reduce the treble response. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite radio
ON for satellite radio to receive all of the
Multipath reception: Because of the reflective necessary data.
characteristics of FM signals, direct and re-
flected signals reach the receiver at the same The satellite radio mode requires an active XM®
time. The signals may cancel each other, satellite radio service subscription. Satellite
resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound. radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and
Guam.
AM radio reception:
Satellite radio performance may be affected if
AM signals, because of their low frequency, can cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite
bend around objects and skip along the ground. radio signal.
In addition, the signals can be bounced off the
ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of If possible, do not put cargo near the satellite
these characteristics. AM signals are also antenna.
subject to interference as they travel from A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna
transmitter to receiver. can affect satellite radio performance. Remove
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing the ice to restore satellite radio reception.
through freeway underpasses or in areas with
many tall buildings. It can also occur for several SAA0480
seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in
areas where no obstacles exist. Compact Disc (CD) player
. Do not force a compact disc into the CD
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical insert slot. This could damage the CD
power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights. and/or CD changer/player.
. Trying to load a CD with the CD door
closed could damage the CD and/or CD
4-32 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
changer. — Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW) The CD can be played when the tem-
perature of the player returns to nor-
. During cold weather or rainy days, the . Do not use the following CDs as they mal.
player may malfunction due to the may cause the CD player to malfunc-
humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD tion. UNPLAYABLE:
and dehumidify or ventilate the player
completely. — 3.1 in (8 cm) discs The file is unplayable in this audio
system (only MP3 or WMA CD).
. The player may skip while driving on — CDs that are not round
rough roads. — CDs with a paper label
CompactFlash (CF) player (if so
equipped)
. The CD player sometimes cannot func- — CDs that are warped, scratched, or
tion when the passenger compartment . Do not force a CF card into the slot.
have abnormal edges This could damage the CF card and/or
temperature is extremely high. De-
crease the temperature before use. . This audio system can only play pre- player.
recorded CDs. It has no capabilities to . During cold weather or rainy days, the
. Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm) record or burn CDs.
round discs that have the “COMPACT player may malfunction due to the
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc . If the CD cannot be played, one of the humidity. If this occurs, remove the CF
or packaging. following messages will be displayed. card and dehumidify or ventilate the
player completely.
. Do not expose the CD to direct sun- CHECK DISC:
light. . The CF player sometimes cannot func-
— Confirm that the CD is inserted tion when the passenger compartment
. CDs that are of poor quality, dirty, correctly (the label side is facing up, temperature is extremely high. De-
scratched, covered with fingerprints, etc.). crease the temperature before use.
or that have pin holes may not work
properly.
— Confirm that the CD is not bent or . Do not expose a CF card to direct
warped and it is free of scratches. sunlight.
. The following CDs may not work prop-
erly:
PUSH EJECT: . Confirm that a CF card is inserted
correctly.
This is an error due to the temperature
— Copy control compact discs (CCCD) inside the player is too high. Remove
— Recordable compact discs (CD-R) the CD by pushing the EJECT button,
and after a short time reinsert the CD.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33
iPod® player (if so equipped) order as they appear on the iPod®. the cable and/or connectors are wet. It
. may damage the iPod®.
Some characters used in other lan- . ®
The iPod nano (1st Generation) may
guages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are remain in fast forward or rewind mode . If the cable and connectors are ex-
not displayed properly on the vehicle if it is connected during a seek opera- posed to water, allow the cable and/or
center screen. We recommend using tion. In this case, please manually reset connectors to dry completely before
English language characters with an the iPod®. connecting the cable to the iPod® (wait
iPod®. 24 hours for it to dry).
. If you are using an iPod® (3rd Genera-
. Large video podcast files cause slow tion with Dock connector), do not use . If the connector is exposed to fluids
responses in the iPod®. The vehicle very long names for the song title, other than water, evaporative residue
center display may momentarily black album name or artist name to avoid may cause a short between the con-
out, but it will soon recover. the iPod® from resetting itself. nector pins. In this case, replace the
. If the iPod® automatically selects large cable, otherwise damage to the iPod®
. Be careful not to do the following, or and a loss of function may occur.
video podcast files while in the shuffle the cable could be damaged and a loss
mode, the vehicle center display may of function may occur. . If the cable is damaged (insulation cut,
momentarily black out, but it will soon connectors cracked, contamination
recover. — Bend the cable excessively (1.6 in (40 such as liquids, dust, dirt, etc. in the
mm) radius minimum). connectors), do not use the cable and
. Improperly plugging in the iPod® may
— Twist the cable excessively (more contact a NISSAN dealer to replace the
cause a checkmark to be displayed on
and off (flickering). Always make sure than 180 degrees). cable with a new one.
that the iPod® is connected properly. — Pull or drop the cable. . When not in use for extended periods
of time, store the cable in a clean, dust
. The iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will — Close the center console lid on the
continue to fast forward or rewind if it free environment at room temperature
cable or connectors. and without direct sun exposure.
is disconnected during a seek opera-
tion. — Store objects with sharp edges in the . Do not use the cable for any other
storage where the cable is stored. purposes other than its intended use in
. An incorrect song title may appear
when the Play Mode is changed while — Spill liquids on the cable and con- the vehicle.
using the iPod® nano (2nd Generation). nectors. . iPod® charging is only possible for
. Audiobooks may not play in the same . Do not connect the cable to the iPod® if devices that support charging via a
FireWire® connection. Devices that can
4-34 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
be charged by the iPod player include: size by approximately 10:1 ratio (Sampling: . ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
®
44.1 kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that
— iPod Classic - 1st through 6th gen- no perceptible loss in quality. MP3 com- contains information about the digital music
eration pression removes the redundant and irrele- file such as song title, artist, album title,
— iPod® Mini - 1st and 2nd generation vant parts of a sound signal that the human encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc.
ear doesn’t hear. ID3 tag information is displayed on the
— iPod® Nano - 1st through 3rd genera- Album/Artist/Track title line on the display.
tion only . WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is a
compressed audio format created by Micro- * Windows® and Windows Media® are regis-
— iPod® Touch - first generation only soft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA tered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
— iPhone® - first generation only codec offers greater file compression than Corporation in the United States of America
the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more and/or other countries.
* The iPod® Classic and iPod® Touch may digital audio tracks in the same amount of
not charge properly in some cases. space when compared to MP3s at the same CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk
level of quality. Corporation in the United States of America
* 12V charging is not possible on the and/or other countries.
iPhone 3G and later models. . Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of
bits per second used by a digital music files.
* iPod® and FireWire® are trademarks of The size and quality of a compressed digital
Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and audio file is determined by the bit rate used
other countries. when encoding the file.
Compact Disc (CD)/CompactFlash (CF) . Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency
with MP3 or WMA is the rate at which the samples of a signal
are converted from analog to digital (A/D
Explanation of terms: conversion) per second.
. MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures . Multisession — Multisession is one of the
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the methods for writing data to media. Writing
most well known compressed digital audio data once to the media is called a single
file format. This format allows for near “CD session, and writing more than once is
quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of called a multisession.
normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an
audio track from CD/CF can reduce the file
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35
SAA1025
Playback order:
Music playback order of the CD/CF with MP3 or
WMA is as illustrated above.
. The folder names of folders not containing
MP3/WMA files are not shown in the
display.
4-36 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Specification chart:
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37
Troubleshooting guide:
4-38 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
4-40 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
the current track on the CD will be played. To eject all the discs, push the EJECT button for portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or
more than 1.5 seconds. laptop computers.
CD PLAY selection:
When this button is pushed while the compact Push the AUX button to play a compatible
To change to another CD already loaded into the disc is being played, the compact disc will come device when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack.
player, push the CD play select buttons *1 to
out and the system will turn off.
*6 .
If the compact disc comes out and is not
REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM): removed, it will be pulled back into the slot
to protect it.
When the RPT button is pushed while the
compact disc is played, the play pattern can be SCAN tuning:
changed as follows:
When the SCAN tuning button is pushed for
(CD) less than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being
played, the beginning of all the tracks of CDs will
be played for 10 seconds in sequence.
When the SCAN tuning button is pushed for
(CD with MP3 or WMA) more than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being
played, the first program in all the CDs will be
played for 10 seconds.
Pushing the button again during this 10 second
period will stop SCAN tuning.
If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within
CD EJECT: 10 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next
When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the disc program.
compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be
ejected. AUX (Auxiliary) button:
To eject the discs selected by the CD select The AUX IN jack is located on the audio unit.
button, push the EJECT button for less than 1.5 The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any
seconds. standard analog audio input such as from a
4-42 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
SAA1850
4-44 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
low frequencies and to stop at the next tuned to that station. Text:
broadcasting station.
If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5 When the “Text” key is selected with the multi-
. For XM satellite radio seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next function controller on the display and then the
station. ENTER button is pushed while the satellite radio
Push the SEEK·CAT or TRACK button is being played, the text information will be
or to tune to the first channel of the *
1 to *
6 Station memory operations: displayed on the screen.
next or previous category.
Twelve stations/channels can be set for the FM . CH Name
During satellite radio reception, the following band (6 for FM1, 6 for FM2) and the SAT radio
notices will be displayed under certain condi- (6 for SAT1, 6 for SAT2), and 6 stations can be . Category
tions. set for the AM band.
. Name
. NO SIGNAL (No signal is received while the 1. Choose the radio band using the radio band
SAT tuner is connected.) select button. . Title
. OFF AIR (Broadcasting signed off) 2. Tune to the desired station using the SEEK, . Other
SCAN or TUNE button. Compact Disc (CD) player/changer op-
. ANTENNA ERROR (Antenna connection
error) 3. Select the desired station/channel and keep eration
pushing any of the desired station preset Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
. LOADING (When the initial setting is buttons * 1 to * 6 until a beep sound is
performed) position, push the LOAD button (if so equipped)
heard. (The radio mutes when the select and insert the compact disc into the slot with the
. UPDATING (When the satellite radio sub- button is pushed.) label side facing up. The compact disc will be
scription is not active) 4. The channel indicator will then come on and guided automatically into the slot and start
playing.
. INVALID CH (Invalid channel is received.) the sound will resume. Memorizing is now
complete. After loading the disc, the number of tracks on
SCAN tuning: 5. Other buttons can be set in the same the disc and the play time will appear on the
manner. display.
Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from low
to high frequencies and stops at each broad- If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse If the radio is already operating, it will auto-
casting station for 5 seconds. Pushing the blows, the radio memory will be erased. In that matically turn off and the compact disc will play.
button again during this 5 seconds period will case, reset the desired stations. If the system has been turned off while the
stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain compact disc was playing, pushing the
4-46 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
ON·OFF/VOL control knob will start the com- Text: When the or button is pushed for less
pact disc. than 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is
When the “Text” key is selected in the screen being played, the next track or the beginning of
using the multi-function controller and then the the current track on the CD will be played.
CD LOAD (if so equipped): ENTER button is pushed while the CD is being
To insert a CD in the CD changer, push the played, the music information below will be The multi-function controller can also be used to
LOAD button for less than 1.5 seconds. Select displayed on the screen. select tracks when a CD is being played.
the loading position by pushing the CD insert CD: CD PLAY selection (if so equipped):
select button *
1 to * 6 , then insert the CD.
. Disc title To change to another CD already loaded into the
To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer in player, push the CD play select buttons *1 to
.
succession, push the LOAD button for more
than 1.5 seconds.
Track title
*6 or choose a disc displayed on the screen
CD with MP3 or WMA: using the multi-function controller.
The inserted slot numbers will illuminate on the
display. . Folder title REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM):
. File title When the RPT button is pushed while the
or PLAY: compact disc is played, the play pattern can be
. Song title
When the DISC (CD play) button is pushed with changed as follows:
the system off and the compact disc loaded, the . Album title
(CD)
system will turn on and the compact disc will . Artist
start to play.
When the DISC button is pushed with the FF (Fast Forward), REW (Re-
compact disc loaded and the radio playing, the wind)/APS (Automatic Pro-
(CD with MP3 or WMA)
radio will automatically be turned off and the gram Search) FF, APS REW:
compact disc will start to play.
When the (fast forward) or (rewind)
When the DISC button is pushed while a CD is button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds
loaded and a medium is played using the while the compact disc is being played, the
auxiliary input jacks, you can toggle back and compact disc will play while fast forwarding or
forth between CD and medium. rewinding. When the button is released, the
compact disc will return to normal play speed.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47
4-48 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
PLAY:
When the DISC button is pushed with the
system off and the CF card inserted, the system
will turn on.
If another audio source is playing and a CF card
is inserted, push the DISC button repeatedly
until the center display changes to the Com-
pactFlash mode.
Text:
When the “Text” key is selected on the screen
using the multi-function controller and then the
SAA1567 SAA1862 ENTER button is pushed while the CF is being
played, the music information below will be
Display Mode: COMPACTFLASH (CF) PLAYER OP- displayed on the screen.
ERATION (models with navigation sys-
The AUX settings display will appear when the . Folder title
tem)
“Setting” key is selected using the multi-
. Song title
function controller and pushing the ENTER Audio main operation
button. Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON . Track title
Choose the display mode from the following: position, remove the cover * A and insert a CF
. Album Title
card * B into the slot. Then, push the
. Normal button repeatedly to switch to the Compact- . Artist
Flash mode.
. Wide
. Cinema If the system has been turned off while the
CompactFlash card was playing, pushing the
ON·OFF/VOL control knob will start the Com-
pactFlash card.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49
iPod® PLAYER OPERATION (if so Compatibility If the system has been turned off while the iPod®
equipped) The following models are available: was playing, pushing the ON·OFF/VOL control
knob will start the iPod®.
Connecting iPod® . Third generation iPod® (Firmware version
Open the console lid and connect the cable * 1 2.3 or later) (Audiobook and Podcast are not DISC/AUX button:
as illustrated, and then connect the other end of available) When the DISC/AUX button is pushed with the
the cable to your iPod® * 2 . Your vehicle is system off and the iPod® connected, the system
equipped with the specialized cable for con- . ®
Fourth generation iPod (Firmware version
3.1.1 or later) will turn on. If another audio source is playing
necting the iPod® to your vehicle audio unit. The and the iPod® is connected, push the DISC
battery of your iPod® is charged while it is . Fifth generation iPod® (Firmware version button repeatedly until the center display
connected to the vehicle if the iPod® supports 1.1.2 or later) changes to the iPod® mode.
charging via a FireWire® connection.
. 5.5 generation iPod® (Firmware version Interface:
The display on the iPod® shows a NISSAN 1.2.3 or later)
screen when the connection is completed. The interface for iPod® operation shown on the
While connecting the iPod® to the vehicle, the . iPod® mini (Firmware version 1.41 or later) vehicle center display is similar to the iPod®
iPod® can only be operated by the vehicle audio interface. Use the multi-function controller and
. iPod® photo (Firmware version 1.2.1 or later) the ENTER or BACK button to play the iPod®
controls.
. iPod® nano (Firmware version 1.2 or later) with your favorite settings.
To disconnect the cable from the vehicle outlet,
fully depress the center connector button to . The first generation iPod® classic (Firmware The following items can be chosen from the
unlatch the connector and pull the connector version 1.0.3 or later) menu list screen. For further information about
straight out of the outlet. To disconnect the each item, see the iPod® Owner’s Manual.
cable from the iPod®, fully depress the side The fourth generation iPod® nano, iPod® touch,
the second generation iPod classic and iPhone . Playlists
connector buttons and pull the iPod® connector
straight out of the iPod®. 3G may not work with the system in some . Artists
cases.
* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in . Albums
the U.S. and other countries. Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated.
. Songs
Audio main operation
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON . Podcasts
position. Then, push the DISC/AUX button . Genres
repeatedly to switch to the iPod® mode.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51
. The skip, fast forward and rewind . There is not enough space in the hard disk
features are disabled while the CD is
recording. . The number of albums reaches the maximum
of 500.
. The recording process can be stopped
at any time. All tracks that were played . The number of tracks reaches the maximum
before the CD was stopped are stored. of 3,000.
4-54 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
. Play by Category
Plays music from one of the following
categories: My Favorites, Hit Songs, Kids’
Songs and Rarely Played.
. Search Artists
Displays a list of artists in alphabetical order.
Selecting an artist displays all of the tracks
by the artist and starts playing the first track.
SAA1684 SAA1685
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55
Music Tempo (All, Slow, Normal and Fast) . Music Box System Info.
Decade (All, ’70s, ’80s, ’90s, ’00s and ’10s Displays the following information about the
and After) “Music Box” hard-disk drive:
Group (All, Male Artist, Female Artist, Group a. “Music Box” Used / Free Space (Informa-
and Duo) tion about “Saved Album”, “Saved Track”
and “Remaining Time” is displayed.)
Category (Rock, Pop, Latin, Jazz, R&B, Hip
Hop, Club/Dance, Punk, Reggae, Folk, b. Mood Categories (Number of saved
Blues, Country, Metal, Easy Listening, New tracks and their categories (Relaxing
Age, Soundtrack, Gospel & Religious, Music, Lively Music, Slow Music, Upbeat
World, Classical, Children’s and Other) Music and Others) are displayed.)
. Search Keywords c. Deleted Items (Information about the
deleted tracks is displayed.)
SAA1686 Input a search keyword using the keypad
displayed on the screen. (See “HOW TO d. Search Missing Titles
. Search Albums USE TOUCH SCREEN (models with navi-
gation system)” earlier in this section.) If titles are not displayed for CDs that have
Displays a list of albums in order of the date been recorded, titles can be acquired using
when they were stored in the system. . Edit Albums one of the following methods:
Selecting an album displays all of the tracks
on the album and starts playing the first Select a category (Rec. (Recorded) Date, — Retrieve from HDD
track. Name, Released Year and Artist) and edit Searches the title using the database in
the details using the keypad displayed on the hard disk.
Select the “Sort” key to re-sort albums in the screen. (See “HOW TO USE TOUCH
one of the following order: Rec. (Recorded) SCREEN (models with navigation system)” — Retrieve from CF
Date, Name, Release Year, Artist. earlier in this section.) Searches the title from the information
acquired on the Internet. Visit
. Search Song Details www.nissanusa.com/gracenote/ for de-
Set the conditions and select the “Start tails.
Song Search” key to search for a desired
song that is stored in the system. The
conditions are as follows:
4-56 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
The Gracenote MusicID Service uses a unique WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE
identifier to track queries for statistical purposes. OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACE-
The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric NOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE
identifier is to allow the Gracenote MusicID SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE
service to count queries without knowing any- BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR
thing about who you are. For more information, INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST
see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.
Policy for the Gracenote MusicID Service.
Copyright:
The Gracenote Software and each item of
Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.” Music recognition technology and related data
Gracenote makes no representations or warran- are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is the
ties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy industry standard in music recognition technol-
of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote ogy and related content delivery. For more
Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete information visit www.gracenote.com.
SAA0451
data from the Gracenote Servers or to change CD and music-related data from Gracenote,
data categories for any cause that Gracenote Inc., copyright * C 2000-2007 Gracenote. CD/CF (CompactFlash) CARE AND
deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software, copyright * C 2000-2007
CLEANING
Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are Gracenote. This product and service may
error-free or that functioning of Gracenote practice one or more of the following U.S. CD
Software or Gracenote Servers will be unin- Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680; . Handle a CD by its edges. Never touch the
terrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide #6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192, surface of the disc. Do not bend the disc.
you with new enhanced or additional data types #6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593, and
or categories that Gracenote may provide in the other patents issued or pending. Some services . Always place the discs in the storage case
future and is free to discontinue its online supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. when they are not being used.
services at any time. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523. Gracenote and . To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote. center to the outer edge using a clean, soft
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular
NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF “Powered by Gracenote” logo are trademarks motion.
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTI- of Gracenote.
CULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRIN- Do not use a conventional record cleaner or
G E M E N T. G R A C E N OT E D O E S N OT alcohol intended for industrial use.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59
SAA1854 SAA1855
With navigation system Without navigation system
1. Source select switch
2. ENTER (models with navigation system) or tuning
(models without navigation system) switch
3. Volume control switch
4. BACK switch
4-60 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
STEERING-WHEEL-MOUNTED CON- Next track or the beginning of the current After selecting an MP3 folder using the up and
TROLS FOR AUDIO track down switch, push the ENTER switch to
complete the selection.
ENTER (models with navigation system) . Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” longer
or tuning (models without navigation While the display is in the NAVI, STATUS or
Folder change (When the last folder on a Audio setting screen, some audio functions can
system) switch disc is playing, the next disc will be also be controlled using the ENTER switch. The
Push the switch upward or downward to select selected.) function varies depending on if you push the
a channel, track, CD or folder when they are switch shorter (less than 1.5 seconds) or longer
iPod® (if so equipped)
listed on the display. (more than 1.5 seconds).
. Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” shorter
Tune/Track:
Previous or next track (Start/Pause or Menu BACK switch
RADIO
can be selected when the ENTER button is Push this switch to go back to the previous
. Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” shorter pushed.) screen or cancel the selection if it is not
. Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” longer completed.
Next or previous preset channel
. Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” longer Rewind or fast forward search Volume control switches
Push the upper (+) or lower (−) side switch to
Next or previous station Music Box hard-disk drive audio system (if increase or decrease the volume.
so equipped)
CD SOURCE select switch
. Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” shorter
. Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” shorter Push the source select switch to change the
Next track or the beginning of the current mode, Preset A, Preset B, Preset C, “iPod®” (if
Next track or the beginning of the current track so equipped), “Music Box” (if so equipped), CD,
track and CompactFlash (if so equipped). If they are
. Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” longer
. Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” longer not ready to function, those modes will be
Playlist change (When the last playlist is skipped.
Disc change (When only one disc is loaded, playing, the next playlist will be selected.)
the 1st track of the disc will be selected.)
ENTER switch operation:
CD/CF (if so equipped) with MP3/WMA
You can also use the ENTER switch to select the
. Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” shorter items on the usual setting menu screen.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61
CAUTION
. To avoid damaging or deforming the
antenna, be sure to remove the
antenna under the following condi-
tions.
— The vehicle enters an automatic
car wash.
4-62 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
This vehicle is equipped with the mobile of contact with skin, wash immedi-
entertainment system, which enables you to ately with soap and water.
play a Digital Versatile Disc (DVD), providing the
images and sounds both in the front and rear . Use a damp, soft cloth when clean-
display screens. ing the Mobile Entertainment Sys-
tem components. Do not use
WARNING solvents or cleaning solutions.
. The driver must not attempt to . Do not attempt to use the system in extreme
operate or view the Mobile Enter- temperature conditions [below −48F
tainment System (MES) while the (−208C) or above 1588F (708C)].
vehicle is in motion so that full . To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, do
attention may be given to vehicle not operate the system more than 15
operation. minutes without starting the engine.
. Do not attempt to modify the system Movies will not be shown on the front display
to display a movie on the front while the vehicle is in any drive position to
screen while the vehicle is being reduce driver distraction. Audio is available
driven. Doing so may distract the when a movie is played. To view movies in the
driver and may cause a collision and front display, stop the vehicle in a safe location,
serious personal injury or death. move the selector lever to the P (Park) position
and apply the parking brake.
CAUTION LHA0484
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63
4-64 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
SAA2002
Flip-down screen
Use the remote controller to operate the
motorized flip-down rear display screen.
1. Push the REAR DISPLAY OPEN/CLOSE
button on the remote controller to open or
close the display.
2. Adjust the display angle by pushing the
DISPLAY TILT button or .
The screen can also be opened using the multi-
function controller. See “Rear Display settings”
earlier in this section.
Do not block the range of the wireless remote
controller receiver and wireless headphones
transmitter *1 .
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65
SAA0720 SAA0721
4-66 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
4. AUX button
5. ENTER button
6. DISP button
7. VOLUME CONTROL button
( or )
8. Headphones button
9. TRACK/CHANNEL button
( or )
10. DISPLAY TILT button
( or )
11. BACK button SAA0978
Remote controller
12. ASPECT button
13. SOUND button
14. Keypad
See “PLAYING A DIGITAL VERSATILE DISC
(DVD)” later in this section for the function of
each buttons.
SAA1861
Remote controller
The remote controller has the following controls:
1. REAR DISPLAY OPEN/CLOSE button
2. DVD button
SAA0723
3. Joystick Headphones
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67
REMOTE CONTROLLER AND HEAD- firm local regulations for battery phones while the vehicle is in motion so
PHONES BATTERY REPLACEMENT disposal. that full attention may be given to
Replace the battery as follows: . When changing batteries, do not let vehicle operation.
dust or oil get on the remote control
1. Open the lid. and headphones.
2. Replace both batteries with new ones. CAUTION
FCC Notice:
. Size AA (remote control) . Only operate the DVD while the
Changes or modifications not expressly
vehicle engine is running. Operating
. Size AAA (headphones) approved by the manufacturer compliance
the DVD for extended periods of
could void the user’s authority to operate
Make sure that the + and 7 ends on the equipment. This device complies with time with the engine OFF can dis-
the batteries match the markings in- Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of charge the vehicle battery.
side the compartment. Industry Canada. Operation is subject to . Do not allow the system to get wet.
3. Close the lid securely. the following two conditions: (1) This Excessive moisture such as spilled
device may not cause harmful interference, liquids may cause the system to
If the battery is removed for any reason and (2) this device must accept any inter- malfunction.
other than replacement, close the lid ference received, including interference
securely. that may cause undesired operation of . While playing VIDEO-CD media, this
the device. DVD player does not guarantee
. If you will not be using the remote complete functionality of all VI-
control for long periods of time, BEFORE OPERATING THE DVD EN- DEO-CD formats.
remove the batteries. TERTAINMENT SYSTEM
. Replacement of the batteries is Precautions Copyright and trademark
needed when the remote control . The technology protected by the U.S. patent
only functions at extremely close Start the engine when using the DVD entertain-
ment system. and other intellectual property rights owned
distances to the MES or not at all. by Macrovision Corporation and other right
. Be careful not to touch the battery holders is adopted for this system.
terminal.
WARNING
. This copyright protected technology cannot
. An improperly disposed battery can The driver must not attempt to operate be used without a permit from Macrovision
harm the environment. Always con- the DVD system or wear the head- Corporation. It is limited to be personal use,
4-68 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
etc., as long as the permit from Macrovision installed DVD player cannot play DVDs with a
Corporation is not issued. region code other than “1” or “ALL”.
. Modifying or disassembling is prohibited. Display settings
. Dolby digital is manufactured under license Front display:
from Dolby Laboratories, Inc.
To adjust the front display mode, press the
. Dolby and the double D mark “ ” are SETTING button while the DVD is being played,
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories, Inc. select the “Others” key with the multi-function
controller, and then press the ENTER button.
. DTS and DTS Digital Surround “ ” are
registered trademarks of DTS, Inc. To adjust the display ON/OFF, brightness, tint,
color, contrast and black level select each key
Parental level (parental control) using the multi-function controller and press the
DVDs with the parental control setting can be ENTER button.
played with this system. Please use your own SAA1829
judgement to set the parental control with the Then you can adjust each item using the multi-
system. function controller. After changes have been PLAYING A DIGITAL VERSATILE DISC
made press the BACK button to save the (DVD)
Disc selection settings.
DISC button
You can play the following disc formats with the Rear display:
DVD drive: Park the vehicle in a safe location for the
To adjust the rear display mode, push the “DISP” front seat occupants to operate the DVD
. DVD-VIDEO (Display) button on the remote controller. drive while watching the images.
. VIDEO-CD To adjust the display brightness, tint, color and Push the “DISC” button on the instrument panel
contrast, select each key using the joystick on to turn the display to the DVD mode.
. CD-DA (Conventional Compact Disc) (CD
with MP3/WMA cannot be played.) the remote controller and tilt the joystick to right When a DVD is loaded, it will be replayed
or left. automatically.
Use DVDs with a region code “1”, “ALL” or “1
included” for your DVD entertainment system. Push the BACK button to apply the settings and The operation screen will be turned on when the
(The region code is displayed as a small symbol return to the previous display. “DISC” button located on the instrument panel
printed on the top of the DVD.) This vehicle- is pushed while a DVD is being played, and it
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69
will turn off automatically after a period of time. To stop playing the DVD, it is also possible to
To turn it on again, push the “DISC” button once push the “ ” button on the keypad of the
more. remote controller.
DVD operation keys
SKIP (FORWARD):
To operate the DVD drive, select the preferred
key displayed on the operation screen using the Select the “ ” key and push the ENTER
multi-function controller. button to skip the chapter(s) of the disc forward.
The chapters will advance the number of times
the ENTER button is pushed.
PAUSE:
Select the “ ” key and push the ENTER To skip the chapter(s) forward, it is also possible
button to pause the DVD. To resume playing the to push the “ ” button on the keypad of the
DVD, use the “PLAY” key. remote controller.
STOP:
Select the “ ” key and push the ENTER
button to stop playing the DVD. SAA1831
Setting (front) — DVD VIDEO-2
4-70 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
DVD settings
Select the “Settings” key with the multi-
function controller and push the ENTER button
to adjust the following settings.
The items indicated with “*” can also be set from
the rear display. Push the “DVD” button on the
remote controller while a DVD is being played.
Select the preferred item using the joystick
“ ” on the remote controller and push the
ENTER “ ” button.
Menu* (DVD-VIDEO):
Some menus specific to each disc will be
SAA2013 SAA1194 shown. For details, see the instructions attached
Setting (front) — DVD VIDEO-3 Setting (rear) — DVD VIDEO-2 to the disc.
Top Menu* (DVD-VIDEO):
Each title menu in the disc will be shown. For
details, see the instructions attached to the disc.
Audio* (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD) / Subtitle*
(DVD-VIDEO):
Choose the preferred language using the multi-
function controller and push the ENTER button.
To turn off the subtitle, push and hold the
ENTER button until a beep sounds.
Display Mode* (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD):
SAA2014 SAA1195 Choose from the “Full”, “Wide”, “Normal” or
Setting (rear) — DVD VIDEO-1 Setting (rear) — DVD VIDEO-3 “Cinema” mode using the multi-function con-
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71
troller and push the ENTER button again. Select No.* (VIDEO-CD): Remote controller operation
Angle* (DVD-VIDEO): Select the “Select No.” key and push the Use the remote controller to adjust the following
ENTER button to open the number entry screen. items.
If the DVD contains different angles (such as
moving images), the current image angle can be Input the number you wish to search for and Rear display open/close:
switched to another one. select the “OK” key with the multi-function To open or close the flip-down rear display, push
controller, and then push the ENTER button. the “ ” button on the remote controller.
Select the “Angle” key and push the ENTER The specified scene will be played.
button. When the “+” side or “−” side is
Joystick:
selected, the angle will change. Menu Skip (DVD-VIDEO):
Use the joystick “ ” to select the items
Angle Mark (DVD-VIDEO): DVD menus are automatically configured and displayed on the rear screen.
the contents will be played directly when the
When this item is turned on, an angle mark will “Menu Skip” key is turned on. Note that some ENTER button:
be shown on the bottom of the screen if the discs may not be played directly even if this item
scene can be seen from a different angle. is turned on. Push the ENTER “ ” button to make the
selected item complete on the rear screen.
10 Key Search* (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD, DVD Language (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD):
CD-DA): BACK button:
Select the “DVD Language” key and push the
Select the “10 Key Search” key and push the ENTER button to open the number entry screen. Press to go back to the previous screen or
ENTER button to open the number entry screen. cancel the selection.
Input the number corresponding to the preferred
Input the number you want to search for and language and select the “OK” key with the multi- Display tilt:
select the “OK” key with the multi-function function controller. Then push the ENTER
controller. Then push the ENTER button. The Adjust the display angle by pushing the “DIS-
button. The DVD top menu language will be PLAY TILT” button or .
specified Title/Chapter or Group/Track will be changed to the one specified.
played. DVD mode:
DRC (DVD-VIDEO):
Title Search* (DVD-VIDEO): To select the DVD mode, push the DVD button.
DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) allows you
The scene with the specified title will be to tune the dynamic range of the sound AUX mode:
displayed the number of times the “+” side or recorded in the Dolby Digital format.
“−” side is selected. To select the AUX (Auxiliary input jacks) mode,
push the AUX button.
4-72 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
. A new disc may be rough on its When installing a car phone or a CB radio in
inner and outer edges. Remove the your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following
cautions, otherwise the new equipment may
rough edges using the side of a pen
adversely affect the electronic control modules
or pencil as illustrated. and electronic control system harness.
. Never attempt to use a DVD that has
been cracked, deformed, or repaired WARNING
using adhesive. Doing so may cause
damage to the equipment. . A cellular telephone should not be
used while driving so full attention
. Handle the DVD carefully to avoid contam- may be given to vehicle operation.
ination or flaws. Otherwise, signals may not Some jurisdictions prohibit the use
be read properly. of cellular telephones while driving.
SAA0451
. Do not write, draw or attach anything on any . If you must make a call while your
side of the DVD. vehicle is in motion, the hands-free
How to handle the DVD . Do not store the DVD in locations with direct cellular phone operational mode (if
sunlight or in high temperatures or humidity. so equipped) is highly recom-
CAUTION . Always place discs in the storage case
mended. Exercise extreme caution
at all times so full attention may be
. Handle a DVD by its edges. Never when they are not being used.
given to vehicle operation.
touch the surface of the disc. . Do not put on any sticker or write anything . If a conversation in a moving vehicle
. To clean a disc, wipe the surface on either surface of the DVD. requires you to take notes, pull off
from the center to the outer edge the road to a safe location and stop
using a clean, soft cloth. Do not your vehicle before doing so.
wipe the disc using a circular mo-
tion.
. Do not use a conventional record
cleaner, benzine, thinner or alcohol
intended for industrial use.
4-74 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
— Your vehicle is outside of the telephone www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble- — Operation is subject to the following two
service area. shooting help. conditions:
— Your vehicle is in an area where it is . Some cellular phones or other devices may 1) this device may not cause interference and
difficult to receive radio waves; such as in cause interference or a buzzing noise to
a tunnel, in an underground parking come from the audio system speakers. 2) this device must accept any interference,
garage, behind a tall building or in a Storing the device in a different location including interference that may cause un-
mountainous area. may reduce or eliminate the noise. desired operation of the device
— Your cellular phone is locked in order not . Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual IC Regulatory information
to be dialed. regarding the telephone pairing procedure — Operation is subject to the following two
specific to your phone, battery charging, conditions: (1) this device may not cause
. When the radio wave condition is not ideal cellular phone antenna, etc. interference, and (2) this device must accept
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be any interference, including interference that
difficult to hear the other person’s voice . The antenna display on the monitor will not may cause undesired operation of the
during a call. coincide with the antenna display of some device.
cellular phones.
. Immediately after the ignition switch is — This Class B digital apparatus meets all
pushed to the ON position, it may be . Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as requirements of the Canadian Interference-
impossible to receive a call for a short possible to hear the caller’s voice clearly as Causing Equipment Regulations.
period of time. well as to minimize its echoes.
Bluetooth trademark:
. Do not place the cellular phone in an area . If reception between callers is unclear,
surrounded by metal or far away from the in- adjusting the incoming or outgoing call BLUETOOTH® is a trademark
vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality volume may improve the clarity. owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
degradation and wireless connection dis- U.S.A.
ruption. REGULATORY INFORMATION
. While a cellular phone is connected through FCC Regulatory information VOICE COMMANDS
the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the — CAUTION: To maintain compliance with You can use voice commands to operate various
battery power of the cellular phone may FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System features
discharge quicker than usual. the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna, using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system.
. If the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System modification, or attachments could damage
For more details, see “NISSAN VOICE RE-
seems to be malfunctioning, please visit the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-
COGNITION SYSTEM (models with navigation
tions.
4-76 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
SAA1895
PAIRING PROCEDURE
1. Push the PHONE button or the button,
and select the “Pair phone” key on the
display using the multi-function controller.
Then push the ENTER button.
SAA1857
CONTROL BUTTONS
1) PHONE button
2) TALK/PHONE SEND button
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77
2. Select the “None (Add New)” key from the 3. When a PIN code appears on the screen, PHONEBOOK REGISTRATION
name list of the phones, and push the operate the Bluetooth® cellular phone to
ENTER button. enter the PIN code. Up to 40 phone numbers can be stored in the
phonebook.
The pairing procedure of the cellular phone
varies according to each cellular phone. See 1. Push the SETTING button, and select the
the cellular phone Owner’s Manual for the “PHONE” key on the display using the multi-
details. You can also visit function controller. Then push the ENTER
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or call button.
NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department for 2. Select the “Phonebook” key, and push the
instructions on pairing NISSAN recom- ENTER button.
mended cellular phones.
3. Select the “None (Add New)” key from the
When the pairing is completed, the screen name list of the phonebook, and push the
will return to the Bluetooth® setup display. ENTER button.
4-78 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
incoming call list. 4. After the call is over, perform one of the
following to finish the call.
— Delete
a. Select the “Hang up” key and push the
Delete a contact that is registered in the ENTER button.
phonebook.
b. Push the button on the steering
wheel.
c. Push the PHONE button on the instru-
ment panel.
There are different methods to make a call.
Select one of the following options instead of
“Call (Phonebook)” in step 2 above.
. Redial
SAA1895
Dial the previously dialed number again.
MAKING A CALL
. Call (Call Logs)
To make a call, follow the procedures below.
Select the name or phone number from the
1. Push the PHONE button on the instrument incoming or outgoing call logs.
panel or the button on the steering
wheel. The “PHONE” screen will appear on . Call (Downloaded)
the display. Select the name or phone number from the
2. Select the “Call (Phonebook)” key on the downloaded call list.
“PHONE” menu, and push the ENTER . Dial (Keypad)
button.
Input the phone number manually using the
3. Select the registered person’s name from keypad displayed on the screen. (See
the list, and push the ENTER button. Dialing “HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN (models
will start and the screen will change to the with navigation system)” earlier in this
call-in-progress screen. section.)
4-80 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
. Answer
Accept an incoming call to talk.
. On Hold
Put an incoming call on hold.
. Reject Call
Reject an incoming call.
To finish the call, perform one of the
following procedures listed below.
a) Select the “Hang up” key on the display and
push the ENTER button.
SAA1578 SAA1579
b) Push the PHONE button on the instrument
RECEIVING A CALL panel. DURING A CALL
When you hear a phone ring, the display will c) Push the button on the steering wheel. There are some options available during a call.
change to the incoming call mode. To receive a Select one of the following displayed on the
call, perform one of the following procedures screen if necessary.
listed below.
. Hang up
a) Select the “Answer” key on the display and
push the ENTER button. Finish the call.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81
. Keypad
Send a dial tone to the caller for using
network services such as voice mail.
. Cancel Mute
This will appear after “Mute” is selected.
Mute will be canceled.
To adjust the person’s voice to be louder or
quieter, push the volume control switch (+ or −)
on the steering wheel or turn the volume control
knob on the instrument panel while talking on
the phone. This adjustment is also available in
the SETTING mode.
SAA1580 SAA1581
4-82 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.
Symptom Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid. (See “NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (models with navigation system)” later in
this section; page 4-99.)
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
System fails to interpret the command
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.
correctly.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too noisy to
use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. (See “PHONEBOOK REGISTRATION” earlier in this
The system consistently selects the section.)
wrong voicetag.
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.
4-84 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
. Some cellular phones or other devices may 1) this device may not cause interference and OPERATING TIPS
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
2) this device must accept any interference, To get the best performance out of the NISSAN
come from the audio system speakers.
including interference that may cause un- Voice Recognition system, observe the follow-
Storing the device in a different location
desired operation of the device ing:
may reduce or eliminate the noise.
IC Regulatory information . Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
. Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual
possible. Close the windows to eliminate
regarding the telephone pairing procedure — Operation is subject to the following two
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
specific to your phone, battery charging, conditions: (1) this device may not cause
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
cellular phone antenna, etc. interference, and (2) this device must accept
from recognizing voice commands correctly.
any interference, including interference that
. The antenna display on the monitor will not may cause undesired operation of the . Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a
coincide with the antenna display of some device. command. Otherwise, the command will not
cellular phones.
be received properly.
— This Class B digital apparatus meets all
. Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as requirements of the Canadian Interference- . Start speaking a command within 5 seconds
possible to hear the caller’s voice clearly as Causing Equipment Regulations. after the tone sounds.
well as to minimize its echoes.
Bluetooth trademark: . Speak in a natural voice without pausing
. If reception between callers is unclear,
between words.
adjusting the incoming or outgoing call BLUETOOTH® is a trademark
volume may improve the clarity. owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., GIVING VOICE COMMANDS
U.S.A.
REGULATORY INFORMATION To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, push
INITIALIZATION and release the button located on the
FCC Regulatory information steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a
— CAUTION: To maintain compliance with When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON command.
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initia-
the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna, lized, which takes a few seconds. If the The command given is picked up by the
modification, or attachments could damage button is pushed before the initialization com- microphone, and voice feedback is given when
the transmitter and may violate FCC regula- pletes, the system will announce “Hands-free the command is accepted.
tions. phone system not ready” and will not react to . If you need to hear the available commands
voice commands. for the current menu again, say “Help” and
— Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: the system will repeat them.
4-86 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
. If a command is not recognized, the system How to say numbers The system repeats the numbers and
announces, “Command not recognized. NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain prompts you to enter more.
Please try again.” Repeat the command in way to speak numbers in voice commands.
a clear voice. —“six six two”
Refer to the rules and examples below.
. If you want to go back to the previous The system repeats the numbers and
. Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”. prompts you to enter more.
command, you can say “Go back” or
“Correction” any time the system is waiting Example: 1-800-662-6200 —“six two zero zero”
for a response.
—“One eight oh oh six six two six two oh . You can say “Star” for * and “Pound” for # at
. You can cancel a command when the oh”, or anytime in any position of the phone number.
system is waiting for a response by saying, (Available only when using the “Call Inter-
“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces —“One eight zero zero six six two six two oh
oh” national” command.)
“Cancel” and ends the voice recognition
(VR) session. You can also push the . Words can be used for the first 4 digits Example: 1-555-1212 *123
button on the steering wheel at any time. places only. —“One five five five one two one two star
Whenever the VR session is canceled, a one two three”
double beep is played to indicate you have Example: 1-800-662-6200
exited the system. NOTE:
—“One eight hundred six six two six two oh
. If you want to adjust the volume of the voice oh”, For best results, say phone numbers as
feedback, push the volume control switches single digits.
—NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty
(+ or −) on the steering wheel while being
two hundred, and
provided with feedback. You can also use
the radio volume control knob. —NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty two
hundred.
NOTE:
The voice command “Help” is available at . Numbers can be spoken in small groups.
any time. Please say “Help” to obtain the The system will prompt you to continuing
information about how to use the NISSAN entering digits, if desired.
Voice Recognition system. Example: 1-800-662-6200
—“One eight zero zero”
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87
4-88 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
system tells you, then prompts you for a 2. Say: “Call” *A . The system acknowledges RECEIVING A CALL
name again. the command and announces the next set of
When you hear the ringtone, press the
available commands.
Also, if more than one phone is paired and button on the steering wheel.
the name sounds too much like a name Say: “Call International” *B to dial more
Once the call has ended, press the button
already used, the system tells you, then than 10 digits using any special characters.
on the steering wheel.
prompts you for a name again.
3. Say the number you wish to call, starting
NOTE:
6. The system asks you to assign a priority level with the area code in the single digit format
* F . The priority level determines which *C . For better recognition results, it is If you do not wish to take the call when you
phone is active when more than one paired recommended to say the numbers in small hear the ringtone, press the button on
Bluetooth® phone is in the vehicle. Follow groups like, the 3-digits area code, the next the steering wheel to reject the call.
the instructions provided by the system or 3 digits, then the last 4 digits. For example, For additional command options, see “LIST OF
see “SETUP” later in this section for more 555-121-3354 can be said as “five five five” VOICE COMMANDS” later in this section.
information on changing priorities. (1st group), “one two one” (2nd group) and
“three three five four” (3rd group). (See
7. The system will ask if you would like to “How to say numbers” earlier in this section
select a custom ringtone * G . Follow the
for more information.)
instructions provided by the system or see
“SETUP” later in this section for more 4. When you have finished speaking the phone
information on selecting ringtones. number, the system repeats it back and
announces the available commands.
MAKING A CALL BY ENTERING A
PHONE NUMBER 5. Say: “Dial” *
D . The system acknowledges
the command and makes the call.
For additional command options, see “LIST OF
VOICE COMMANDS” later in this section.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89
Remember to wait for the tone before See “PHONE BOOK” later in this section to
speaking. learn how to store entries.
You can say “Help” to hear the list of commands When prompted by the system, say the name of
currently available any time the system is waiting the phone book entry (voicetag) you wish to call.
for a response. The system acknowledges the name.
If you want to end an action without completing If there are multiple locations associated with
it, you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time the name, the system asks you to choose the
while the system is waiting for a response. The location.
4-90 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Once you have confirmed the name and and ends the VR session. numbers. The system then ends the VR
location, the system begins the call. session and returns to the call.
International
<Number> (speak digits) . “Transfer Call” — Use the Transfer Call
For dialing more than 10 digits or any special command to transfer the call from the
When prompted by the system, say the number characters, please say “Call International”. Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System to
you wish to call. (See “How to say numbers” When the system acknowledges the command, the cellular phone when privacy is desired.
earlier in this section and “MAKING A CALL BY the system will prompt you to speak the number.
ENTERING A PHONE NUMBER” earlier in this The system announces, “Transfer call. Call
section for more details.) During a call transferred to privacy mode.” The system
During a call there are several command options then ends the VR session.
“Redial”
available. Press the button on the steering You can also issue the Transfer Call
Use the Redial command to call the last number wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter command again to return to a hands-free
that was dialed within the vehicle. commands. call through the vehicle.
NOTE: . “Help” — The system announces the avail- . “Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute
The system will not redial the last number able commands. your voice so the other party cannot hear it.
dialed by the handset keypad. . “Go back/Correction” — The system an- Use the mute command again to unmute
nounces “Go back,” ends the VR session your voice.
The system acknowledges the command, re-
peats the number and begins dialing. and returns to the call. NOTE:
If a redial number does not exist, the system . “Cancel/Quit” — The system announces If the other party ends the call or the
announces, “There is no number to redial” and “Cancel,” ends the VR session and returns cellular phone network connection is lost
ends the VR session. to the call. while the Mute feature is on, the Mute
feature may need to be reset to “off.”
“Callback” . “Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Send
command to enter numbers during a call.
Use the Call Back command to dial the number For example, if you were directed to dial an
of the last incoming call within the vehicle. extension by an automated system:
The system acknowledges the command, re- Say: “Send one two three four.”
peats the number and begins dialing. If a call
back number does not exist, the system The system acknowledges the command
announces, “There is no number to call back” and sends the tones associated with the
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91
When prompted by the system, say the name the cellular phone via the Bluetooth® commu-
you would like to give the new entry (voicetag). nication link.
For example, say: “Mary.” The transfer procedure varies according to each
cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s
If the name is too long or too short, the system Manual for details. You can also visit
tells you, then prompts you for a name again. www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions
Also, if the name sounds too much like a name on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN
already stored, the system tells you, then recommended cellular phones.
prompts you for a name again. The system repeats the number and prompts
Once the system accepts the name and you you for the next command. When you have
confirm it is correct, the system asks for a finished entering numbers, choose “Store.”
location (Home, Office, Mobile or Other). The system confirms the name, location and
SAA1928 For example, say: “Home.” number. The system then asks if you would like
to store another location for the same name. If
PHONE BOOK The system acknowledges the location. you do not wish to store another location, the
The system will ask you to say a phone number system ends the VR session.
The Phone Book stores up to 40 names for each
phone paired with the system. Each name can or to transfer a phone number stored in the “Edit”
have up to 4 locations/phone numbers asso- cellular phone’s memory.
Use the Edit command to alter an existing phone
ciated with it. To enter a phone number by voice command: book entry or to add a 2nd, 3rd or 4th phone
NOTE: For example, say: “five five five one two one number to an existing entry.
Each phone has its own separate phone two.” (See “How to say numbers” earlier in this When prompted by the system, say the name of
book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone section for more information.) the entry you wish to edit.
book if you are currently connected with
Phone B. To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular The system acknowledges the name and asks
phone’s memory (if so equipped): you for the location you would like to edit.
“New Entry”
Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges Say the name of the location.
Use the New Entry command to store a new the command and asks you to initiate the
name in the system. transfer from the phone handset. The new The system acknowledges the location.
contact phone number will be transferred from
4-92 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
The system will ask you to say a phone number “Delete” You can stop the playback of the list at any time
or to transfer a phone number stored in the by pressing the button on the steering
cellular phone’s memory. Use the Delete command to erase one entry wheel. The system ends the VR session.
from the phone book, all entries from the phone
To enter a phone number by voice command: book, the current redial number or the current
call back number.
For example, say: “five five five one two one
two.” (See “How to say numbers” earlier in this To delete entries from the phone book, say a
section for more information.) name or “All entries” when prompted by the
system.
To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular
phone’s memory (if so equipped): The system acknowledges the command and
asks you to confirm the deletion.
Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges
the command and asks you to initiate the To delete the current redial number or call back
transfer from the phone handset. The new number, say “redial number” or “call back
contact phone number will be transferred from number” when prompted by the system.
the cellular phone via the Bluetooth® commu-
nication link. If a redial number or a call back number exists,
the system deletes them without asking for
The transfer procedure varies according to each confirmation.
cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual for details. You can also visit If there is no number for the entry you are trying
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions to delete, the system says so and ends the VR
on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN session.
recommended cellular phones. “List Names”
The system repeats the number and prompts Use the List Names command to hear all the
you for the next command. When you have names and locations in the phone book.
finished entering numbers, choose “Store.”
The system recites the phone book entries but
The system confirms the name, location and does not include the actual phone numbers.
number, then announces that the entry has been When the playback of the list is complete the
stored. The system then ends the VR session. system ends the VR session.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-93
Up to 5 phones can be paired. If you try to pair a “Select Phone” For example, if the current priority levels are:
sixth phone, the system announces that you
must first delete one phone or replace an Use the Select Phone command to select a Priority Level 1 = Phone A
existing phone. phone of lesser priority when two or more Priority Level 2 = Phone B
phones paired with Bluetooth® Hands-Free Priority Level 3 = Phone C
If you try to pair a phone that has already been Phone System are in the vehicle at the same
paired to your vehicle’s system, the system time. and you change the priority level of Phone C to
announces the name the phone is already using. Level 1, then:
The pairing procedure will then be canceled. The system asks you to name the phone and
confirm the selection. Priority Level 1 = Phone C
When prompted by the system, choose from the Priority Level 2 = Phone B
following commands: Once the selection is confirmed, the selected Priority Level 3 = Phone A
phone remains active until the ignition switch is
. “New phone” — see “PAIRING PROCE- pushed to the LOCK position or you select a “Delete Phone”
DURE” earlier in this section. new phone. Use the Delete Phone command to delete a
. “Replace phone” — The system announces “Change Priority” specific phone or all phones from the Bluetooth®
the names of the phones already paired and Hands-Free Phone System.
asks which you would like to replace. Use the Change Priority command to change
the priority level of the active phone. The system announces the names of the phones
Once you say the name of the phone you already paired with the system and their priority
wish to replace, the paring procedure will The priority level determines which phone is level. The system then gives you the option to
begin. (See “PAIRING PROCEDURE” ear- active when more than one paired Bluetooth® delete a specific phone, all phones or listen to
lier in this section.) phone is in the vehicle. the list again.
. “List phone” — See the description below. The system states the priority level of the active Once you choose to delete a phone or all
phone and asks for a new priority level (1, 2, 3, phones, the system asks you to confirm this
“List Phones” 4, 5). action.
Use the List Phone command to hear the names If the new priority level is already being used for NOTE:
of the phones currently paired. If no phones are another phone, the two phones will swap priority When you delete a phone, the associated
paired, the system announces, “No paired levels. phone book for that phone will also be
phones to list.” The system then ends the VR deleted.
session.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-95
“Select Ring tone” memory locations are in use, the system will ask 9. When training is finished, the system will tell
the user to select which memory location should you an adequate number of phrases have
Use the Select Ring tone command to select the be overwritten. been recorded.
tone heard in the vehicle when an incoming call
is received. Training procedure 10. The system will ask you to say your name.
The procedure for training a voice is as follows. Follow the instructions to register your
The system announces the name of the active name.
phone and asks you to choose from the 1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet
following commands: outdoor location. 11. The system will announce that speaker
adaptation has been completed and the
. “Ringtone” — The system plays a ringtone 2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine system is ready.
and asks if you would like to select that tone. running, the parking brake on, and the
If you say no, the system plays the next transmission in the P (Park) position. The SA mode will stop if:
ringtone available and continues to cycle
through the ringtones until you select one or 3. Press and hold the button for more . The button is pressed for more than 5
quit. than 5 seconds. seconds in SA mode.
. “Silent” — The system asks you to confirm 4. The system announces: “Press the PHONE/ . The vehicle is driven during SA mode.
your wish to disable the ringtone. SEND ( ) button for the hands-free . The ignition switch is pushed to the OFF or
phone system to enter the speaker adapta- LOCK position.
SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE tion mode”.
Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of Training phrases
5. Press the button.
dialect users to train the system to improve During the SA mode, the system instructs you to
recognition accuracy. By repeating a number of 6. Voice memory A or memory B is selected say the following phrases.
commands, the users can create a voice model automatically. If both memory locations are
already in use, the system will prompt you to (The system will prompt you for each phrase.)
of their own voice that is stored in the system.
The system is capable of storing a different overwrite one. Follow the instructions pro- . phone book new entry
speaker adaptation model for memory A and vided by the system.
memory B. . dial three oh four two nine
7. When preparation is complete and you are
If memory A is available, the system will use ready to begin, the press the button. . delete call back number
memory A to store the model. If memory A is in . setup pair phone
8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow the
use and memory B is available, the system will
instructions provided by the system. . memo pad play
use memory B to store the model. If both of the
4-96 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
. eight pause nine three two pause seven . four three pause two nine pause zero
. delete all entries . delete redial number
. call seven two four zero nine . phone book list names
. phone book delete entry . call eight oh five four one
. memo pad record . Correction
. dial star two one seven oh . setup change ringtone
. Yes . dial seven four oh one eight
. No . setup main menu
. select ringtone . Delete
. dial eight five six nine two . dial nine seven two six six
. Bluetooth on . memo pad delete
. setup change priority . call seven six three oh one
. call three one nine oh two . go back
. nine seven pause pause three oh eight . call five six two eight zero
. Cancel . dial six six four three seven
. call back number
. call star two zero nine five
. delete phone
. dial eight three zero five one
. Home
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-97
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.
Symptom Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid. (See “LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS” earlier in this section.)
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.
System fails to interpret the command 4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too noisy to
correctly. use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to improve the
recognition response for the speaker. (See “SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE” earlier in this section.)
The system consistently selects the 1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by using the
wrong entry (voicetag) from the phone “List Names” command. (See “PHONE BOOK” earlier in this section.)
book. 2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.
4-98 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Available items:
. Getting Started
Describes the basics of how to operate the
NISSAN Voice Recognition system.
. Placing Calls
Tutorial for making a phone call by voice
command operation.
. Finding a Street Address
Tutorial for entering a destination by street
address.
SAA1917 SAA2164 . Help on Speaking
4. Highlight the “Alternate Command Mode” 1. Push the INFO button on the instrument Displays useful tips of speaking for correct
key and push the ENTER button. panel. command recognition by the system.
5. The indicator turns off and the Standard 2. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key using . Voice Recognition Settings
Mode activates. the NISSAN controller and push the ENTER
button. Describes the available voice recognition
Displaying user guide settings.
If you use the NISSAN Voice Recognition 3. Highlight the “User Guide” key using the
NISSAN controller and push the ENTER Note that the Command List feature is only
system for the first time or you do not know available when Alternate Command Mode is
how to operate it, you can display the User button.
active.
Guide for confirmation. 4. Highlight an item using the NISSAN con-
You can confirm how to use voice commands by troller and push the ENTER button.
accessing a simplified User Guide, which You can skip steps 1 and 2 above if you say
contains basic instructions and tutorials for “Help”.
several voice commands.
4-100 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Recognition.
SAA1904 SAA2165
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-103
Command List
Category Command:
Command Action
Phone Operates Phone function
Navigation Operates Navigation function
Information Displays vehicle Information function
Help Displays User Guide
. Phone Command:
Command Action
Dial Number Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits.
Redial Makes a call to the latest dialed number.
Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the Phonebook.
International Call Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken.
Change Number Corrects the phone number when it is not recognized. (Available during phone number entry)
. Navigation Command:
See the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
. Information Command:
Command Action
Fuel Economy Displays fuel economy information.
Maintenance Displays maintenance information.
Traffic Info. Turns the traffic information system ON and OFF.
4-104 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
SAA1859 SAA1908
Example 1 - Placing a call to the phone 2. The system announces, “Would you like to
access Phone, Navigation, Information or
number 800-662-6200:
Help?”
1. Push the TALK switch located on the
steering wheel. 3. Speak “Phone”.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-105
4. Speak “Dial Number”. 5. Speak “8 0 0”. 6. The system announces, “Please say the next
three digits or dial, or say change number.”
7. Speak “6 6 2”.
4-106 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-107
Example 2 - Placing an international call to 2. The system announces, “Would you like to 4. Speak “International Call”.
access Phone, Navigation, Information or
the phone number 011-81-111-222-3333:
Help?”
1. Push the TALK switch located on the
steering wheel. 3. Speak “Phone”.
4-108 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
SAA1914 SAA1915
Please note that in this mode the recognition
success rate may be affected as the number of
5. Speak “01181111222333”. 6. Speak “Dial”. available commands and ways of speaking each
command are increased. To improve the recog-
7. System makes a call to 011-81-111-222- nition success rate, try using the Speaker
3333. Adaptation Function available in that mode.
Note: (See “Speaker adaptation function (for Alternate
Command Mode)” later in this section.)
Any digit input format is available in the
International Number input process. In the Alternate Command Mode, review the
expanded command list for this mode, as some
commands available in the Standard Mode are
replaced. Please see the examples on the
screen.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-109
Activating Alternate Command Mode 4. Highlight the “Alternate Command Mode” 1. Push the INFO button on the instrument
When the Standard Mode is active, perform the key and push the ENTER button. panel.
following steps to switch to the Alternate 5. The confirmation message is displayed on 2. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key using
Command Mode. the screen. Push the “OK” key to activate the NISSAN controller and push the ENTER
1. Push the SETTING button on the instrument the Alternate Command Mode. button.
panel. Displaying command list 3. Highlight the “Command List” key using the
2. Highlight the “Others” key on the display If you are controlling the system by voice NISSAN controller and push the ENTER
and then push the ENTER button. commands for the first time or do not know the button.
appropriate voice command, perform the follow- You can skip steps 1 and 2 above if you say
3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key and ing procedure for displaying the voice command
then push the ENTER button. “Help”.
list (available only in Alternate Command Mode).
4-110 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
SAA1901 SAA2031
4. Highlight a category using the NISSAN 5. Highlight an item using the NISSAN con-
controller and push the ENTER button. troller and push the ENTER button.
6. If necessary, scroll the screen using the
NISSAN controller to view the entire list.
7. Press the BACK button to return to the
previous screen.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-111
COMMAND ACTION
Redial Redials the phone number last dialed.
Dial Number Dials the phone number given in the command.
Phonebook Shows the first page of the “Phonebook” list.
Outgoing Calls Shows the outgoing call history (1 to 5).
Incoming Calls Shows the incoming call history (1 to 5).
International Call Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken.
Audio Commands:
. Music Box
COMMAND ACTION
Music Box Turns on the “Music Box” hard-disk drive audio system.
. Radio
COMMAND ACTION
Radio Turns the radio on, selecting the station and band last played.
Radio AM Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played.
Radio FM Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played.
4-112 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
. Satellite
COMMAND ACTION
Satellite Radio Turns the SAT radio on, selecting the station and band last played.
. CD
COMMAND ACTION
CD Starts to play a CD.
. Audio
COMMAND ACTION
Audio OFF Turns the audio system off.
. iPod®
COMMAND ACTION
iPod® ®
Turns the iPod system on.
COMMAND ACTION
Traffic Info. Turns the traffic information system ON and OFF.
Fuel Economy Displays the Fuel Economy screen.
Maintenance Displays the Maintenance screen.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-113
Climate Commands:
COMMAND ACTION
Climate Control Turns the climate control system on and operates it in the AUTO mode.
Climate Control OFF Turns the climate control system off.
4-114 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
. Placing Calls
Tutorial for making a phone call by voice
command operation.
. Help on Speaking
Displays useful tips for how to correctly
speak commands in order for them to be
properly recognized by the system.
. Voice Recognition Settings
Describes the available voice recognition
settings.
. Adapting the System to Your Voice.
SAA1783 SAA2170
Tutorial adapting the system to your voice.
Displaying user guide 4. Highlight an item using the NISSAN con-
You can confirm how to use voice commands by troller and push the ENTER button. USING THE SYSTEM
accessing a simplified User Guide, which Available items:
contains basic instructions and tutorials for
Initialization
several voice commands. . Getting Started When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initia-
1. Push the INFO button on the instrument Describe the basics of how to operate the lized, which takes a few seconds. When
panel. NISSAN Voice Recognition system. completed, the system is ready to accept voice
2. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key using . Using the Address Book commands. If the TALK switch is pushed
the NISSAN controller and push the ENTER before the initialization completes the display will
Refer to Navigation System Owner’s Man- show the message: “Phonetic data downloaded.
button. ual. Please wait.” or a beep sounds.
3. Highlight the “User Guide” key using the . Finding a Street Address (if so equipped)
NISSAN controller and push the ENTER Before starting
button. Refer to Navigation System Owner’s Man- To get the best performance from NISSAN
ual. Voice Recognition, observe the following:
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-115
4-116 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
. Push the TALK switch again to pause Note 1: For the best voice recognition phone
the operation. Push the TALK switch to dialing results, say phone numbers as single
restart the operation. digits.
. If you want to adjust the volume of the Note 2: You cannot say 555-6000 as “five five
system feedback, push the volume control five six thousands”.
buttons (+ or −) on the steering wheel or Note 3: When speaking a house number, speak SAA1907
use the audio system volume knob while the the number “0” as “zero”. If the letter “o (Oh)” is
system is making an announcement.
Speaker adaptation function (for Alter-
included in the house number, it will not be
recognized as the number “0 (zero)” even if you
nate Command Mode)
How to speak numbers: The voice recognition system has a function to
speak “oh” instead of “zero”. You can only say
NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain “zero” for “0 (Zero)”. learn the user’s voice for better voice recognition
way to speak numbers when giving voice performance. The system can memorize the
commands. Refer to the following examples. voices of up to three persons.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-117
SAA1918 SAA2171
4. Select the user whose voice is memorized 5. Select a category to be learned by the
by the system and push the ENTER button. system from the following list and then push
the ENTER button.
. Navigation
. Phone
. Audio
. Information
. Climate
The voice commands in the category are
displayed.
4-118 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
SAA1921 SAA1922
7. The system requests that you repeat a Speaker Adaptation function settings:
command after a tone.
Edit Name
8. After the tone sounds and the icon on the
screen changes from to , speak Edit the user name using the keypad displayed
the command that the system requested. on the screen.
9. When the system has recognized the voice Store Result
command, the voice of the user is learned.
When this item is turned to ON, the voice
Push the switch or BACK button to return recognition system can easily recognize the
to the previous screen. user’s voice that it has learned.
If the system has learned the command cor- Reset Result
rectly, the voice command indicator on the
Resets the user’s voice that the voice recogni-
screen turns on.
tion system has learned.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-119
Continuous Learning
When this item is turned to ON, you can have
the system learn the voice commands in
succession, without selecting commands one
by one.
Minimize voice feedback (for Alternate
Command Mode)
To minimize the voice feedback from the system,
perform the following steps.
1. Push the SETTING button on the instrument
panel.
2. Highlight the “Others” key using the
NISSAN controller and push the ENTER
button.
3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key and
then push the ENTER button.
4. Highlight the “Minimize Voice Feedback” key
and push the ENTER button.
5. The item is turned to ON and the vocal
feedback is reduced if the voice recognition
system is activated.
4-120 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, follow the solutions given in this guide for the
appropriate error.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number one, until the problem is resolved.
Symptom/error message Solution
Displays “COMMAND NOT RECOGNIZED” or the 1. Ensure that the command format is valid, see “Command List” earlier in this section.
system fails to interpret the command correctly.
2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.
3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on.
NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.
4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place.
The system consistently selects the wrong voicetag in 1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. (See “BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE
the phonebook. PHONE SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM” earlier in this section; page 4-75.)
2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-121
MEMO
4-122 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
vehicle inspected promptly by a possible, and inflate them to the proper pres-
WARNING NISSAN dealer. sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
. The exhaust gas and the exhaust . Avoid driving with an extremely low failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-
system are very hot. Keep people, fuel level. Running out of fuel could ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
animals or flammable materials cause the engine to misfire, dama- vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
away from the exhaust system com- ging the three-way catalyst.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
ponents. . Do not race the engine while warm- proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
. Do not stop or park the vehicle over ing it up. responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
flammable materials such as dry . Do not push or tow your vehicle to even if under-inflation has not reached the level
grass, waste paper or rags. They start the engine. to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
may ignite and cause a fire. pressure telltale.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS- Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TEM (TPMS) TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
CAUTION system is not operating properly. The TPMS
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), malfunction indicator is combined with the low
. Do not use leaded gasoline. Depos- should be checked monthly when cold and tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a
its from leaded gasoline will ser- inflated to the inflation pressure recommended malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-
iously reduce the three-way by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle mately one minute and then remain continuously
catalyst’s ability to help reduce ex- placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
haust pollutants. vehicle has tires of a different size than the size subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation malfunction exists. When the malfunction indi-
. Keep your engine tuned up. Mal- pressure label, you should determine the proper
functions in the ignition, fuel injec- cator is illuminated, the system may not be able
tire inflation pressure for those tires.) to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
tion, or electrical systems can cause
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
overrich fuel flow into the three-way reasons, including the installation of replace-
been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring
catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
not keep driving if the engine mis- pressure telltale when one or more of your tires that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
fires, or if noticeable loss of perfor- is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale
mance or other unusual operating the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you after replacing one or more tires or wheels on
conditions are detected. Have the should stop and check your tires as soon as your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
Starting and driving 5-3
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to sure warning light” in the “2. Instruments and “FLAT TIRE” in the “6. In case of
continue to function properly. controls” section and “TIRE PRESSURE MON- emergency” section for changing a
ITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “6. In case of flat tire.)
Additional information emergency” section.
. The TPMS does not monitor the tire . When a spare tire is mounted or a
pressure of the spare tire. wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not
WARNING function and the low tire pressure
. The TPMS will activate only when the warning light will flash for approxi-
vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH . If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sud- mately 1 minute. The light will
(25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect
a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a den steering maneuvers or abrupt remain on after 1 minute. Contact
flat tire while driving). braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull your NISSAN dealer as soon as
off the road to a safe location and possible for tire replacement and/
. The low tire pressure warning light does not or system resetting.
stop the vehicle as soon as possi-
automatically turn off when the tire pressure
is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the ble. Driving with under-inflated tires . Replacing tires with those not ori-
recommended pressure, the vehicle must be may permanently damage the tires ginally specified by NISSAN could
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) and increase the likelihood of tire affect the proper operation of the
to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire failure. Serious vehicle damage TPMS.
pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure could occur and may lead to an . Do not inject any tire liquid or
gauge to check the tire pressure. accident and could result in serious aerosol tire sealant into the tires,
. Tire pressure rises and falls depending on personal injury. Check the tire pres- as this may cause a malfunction of
the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation sure for all four tires. Adjust the tire the tire pressure sensors.
and the outside temperature. Low outside pressure to the recommended COLD
temperature can lower the temperature of tire pressure shown on the Tire and
the air inside the tire which can cause a Loading Information label to turn CAUTION
lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause the low tire pressure warning light
the low tire pressure warning light to OFF. If the light still illuminates . The TPMS may not function properly
illuminate. If the warning light illuminates in while driving after adjusting the tire when the wheels are equipped with
low ambient temperature, check the tire pressure, a tire may be flat. If you tire chains or the wheels are buried
pressure for all four tires. have a flat tire, replace it with a in snow.
For additional information, see “Low tire pres- spare tire as soon as possible. (See . Do not place metalized film or any
5-4 Starting and driving
metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the harmful interference, and (2) this device so.
windows. This may cause poor re- must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause un- Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in
ception of the signals from the tire collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an
desired operation of the device.
pressure sensors, and the TPMS will unbelted or improperly belted person is
not function properly. AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLL- significantly more likely to be injured or
OVER killed than a person properly wearing a
Some devices and transmitters may temporarily seat belt.
interfere with the operation of the TPMS and
cause the low tire pressure warning light to WARNING ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD
illuminate. Some examples are: DRIVING PRECAUTIONS
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe
. Facilities or electric devices using similar and prudent manner may result in loss
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
radio frequencies are near the vehicle. rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
of control or an accident.
. If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is They have higher ground clearance than pas-
being used in or near the vehicle. Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey senger cars to make them capable of performing
all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, in a variety of on-pavement and off-road
. If a computer (or similar equipment) or a DC/ high speed cornering, or sudden steering applications. This gives them a higher center of
AC converter is being used in or near the maneuvers, because these driving practices gravity than ordinary cars. An advantage of
vehicle. could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. higher ground clearance is a better view of the
As with any vehicle, a loss of control could road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
FCC Notice: result in a collision with other vehicles or However, they are not designed for cornering
Changes or modifications not expressly objects, or cause the vehicle to rollover, at the same speeds as conventional passenger
approved by the party responsible for particularly if the loss of control causes the cars any more than low-slung sports cars are
compliance could void the user’s authority vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road
to operate the equipment. times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or
when under the influence of alcohol or drugs abrupt maneuvers, particularly at high speeds.
This device complies with Part 15 of the (including prescription or over-the-counter As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Cana- drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss
da. wear your seat belt as outlined in the “SEAT of control or vehicle rollover. Seat belts help
Operation is subject to the following two BELTS” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat belts and reduce the risk of injury in collisions and
conditions: (1) This device may not cause supplemental restraint system” section of this rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted or
manual, and also instruct your passengers to do improperly belted person is significantly more
Starting and driving 5-5
likely to be injured or killed than a person surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the
properly wearing a seat belt. appropriate driving lane. WARNING
Be sure to read “DRIVING SAFETY PRECAU- . If you decide that it is not safe to return The following actions can increase the
TIONS” later in this section. the vehicle to the road surface based on chance of losing control of the vehicle if
vehicle, road or traffic conditions, gra- there is a sudden loss of tire air
OFF-ROAD RECOVERY dually slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe pressure. Losing control of the vehicle
While driving, the right side or left side wheels place off the road.
may cause a collision and result in
may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS personal injury.
occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by
. The vehicle generally moves or pulls
following the procedure below. Please note that Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can
this procedure is only a general guide. The occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due in the direction of the flat tire.
vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure . Do not rapidly apply the brakes.
the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic. loss can also be caused by driving on under- . Do not rapidly release the accelera-
inflated tires. tor pedal.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling . Do not rapidly turn the steering
2. Do not apply the brakes. and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway wheel.
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel speeds.
with both hands and try to hold a straight Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by main- 1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
course. taining the correct air pressure and visually 2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel
4. When appropriate, slowly release the accel- inspect the tires for wear and damage. See with both hands and try to hold a straight
erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle. “WHEELS AND TIRES” in the “8. Maintenance course.
and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the 3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-
vehicle to follow the road while the vehicle If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or “blows-out” erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
speed is reduced. Do not attempt to drive while driving maintain control of the vehicle by
the vehicle back onto the road surface until following the procedure below. Please note that 4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location
vehicle speed is reduced. this procedure is only a general guide. The off the road and away from traffic if possible.
vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on
6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the 5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually
the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
steering wheel until both tires return to the stop the vehicle.
road surface. When all tires are on the road
5-6 Starting and driving
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And Instead drive either straight up or
either contact a roadside emergency service that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, straight down the slopes. Off-road
to change the tire or see “CHANGING A prescription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if vehicles can tip over sideways much
FLAT TIRE” in the “6. In case of emergency” your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by more easily than they can forward or
section of this Owner’s Manual. alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.
backward.
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . Many hills are too steep for any
DRIVING Your NISSAN is designed for both normal and vehicle. If you drive up them, you
off-road use. However, avoid driving in deep may stall. If you drive down them,
WARNING water or mud as your NISSAN is mainly you may not be able to control your
designed for leisure use, unlike a conventional speed. If you drive across them, you
Never drive under the influence of off-road vehicle. may roll over.
alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the blood- Remember that Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) mod- . Do not shift ranges while driving on
stream reduces coordination, delays els are less capable than All-Wheel Drive downhill grades as this could cause
reaction time and impairs judgement. (AWD) models for rough road driving and loss of control of the vehicle.
Driving after drinking alcohol increases extrication when stuck in deep snow, mud, or . Stay alert when driving to the top of
the likelihood of being involved in an the like.
a hill. At the top there could be a
accident injuring yourself and others.
Please observe the following precautions: drop-off or other hazard that could
Additionally, if you are injured in an
cause an accident.
accident, alcohol can increase the se-
verity of the injury. WARNING . If your engine stalls or you cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill,
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However, . Drive carefully when off the road never attempt to turn around. Your
you must choose not to drive under the influence and avoid dangerous areas. Every vehicle could tip or roll over. Always
of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are person who drives or rides in this back straight down in R (Reverse)
injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. vehicle should be seated with their range. Never back down in N (Neu-
Although the local laws vary on what is seat belt fastened. This will keep tral), using only the brake, as this
considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is you and your passengers in position
that alcohol affects all people differently and could cause loss of control.
when driving over rough terrain.
most people underestimate the effects of . Heavy braking going down a hill
alcohol. . Do not drive across steep slopes. could cause your brakes to overheat
Starting and driving 5-7
and fade, resulting in loss of control that the driver and all passengers are raised off the ground. Make sure
and an accident. Apply brakes have their seat belts fastened. you inform test facility personnel
lightly and use a low range to . Always drive with the floor mats in that your vehicle is equipped with
control your speed. place as the floor may became hot. AWD before it is placed on a
. Unsecured cargo can be thrown dynamometer. Using the wrong test
. Lower your speed when encounter-
around when driving over rough equipment may result in drivetrain
ing strong crosswinds. With a higher
terrain. Properly secure all cargo damage or unexpected vehicle
center of gravity, your NISSAN is
so it will not be thrown forward movement which could result in
more affected by strong side winds.
and cause injury to you or your serious vehicle damage or personal
Slower speeds ensure better vehicle
passengers. injury. (AWD models)
control.
. To avoid raising the center of gravity . When a wheel is off the ground due
. Do not drive beyond the perfor-
excessively, do not exceed the rated to an unlevel surface, do not spin
mance capability of the tires, even
capacity of the roof rack (if so the wheel excessively.
with AWD engaged.
equipped) and evenly distribute the . Accelerating quickly, sharp steering
. For AWD equipped vehicles, do not
load. Secure heavy loads in the maneuvers or sudden braking may
attempt to raise two wheels off the
cargo area as far forward and as cause loss of control.
ground and shift the transmission to
low as possible. Do not equip the . If at all possible, avoid sharp turning
any drive or reverse position with
vehicle with tires larger than speci- maneuvers, particularly at high
the engine running. Doing so may
fied in this manual. This could cause speeds. Your vehicle has a higher
result in drivetrain damage or un-
your vehicle to roll over. center of gravity than a conventional
expected vehicle movement which
. Do not grip the inside or spokes of could result in serious vehicle da- passenger car. The vehicle is not
the steering wheel when driving off- mage or personal injury. designed for cornering at the same
road. The steering wheel could speeds as conventional passenger
. Do not attempt to test an AWD
move suddenly and injure your cars. Failure to operate this vehicle
equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dy-
hands. Instead drive with your fin- correctly could result in loss of
namometer (such as the dynam-
gers and thumbs on the outside of control and/or a rollover accident.
ometers used by some states for
the rim. . Always use tires of the same type,
emissions testing), or similar equip-
. Before operating the vehicle, ensure ment even if the other two wheels size, brand, construction (bias, bias-
. The cargo area is not included in the The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition
operating range, but the Intelligent Key may switch position cannot be switched to LOCK
function. until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park)
position.
. If the Intelligent Key is placed on the
instrument panel, inside the glove box or When the ignition switch cannot be pushed
door pocket, the Intelligent Key may not toward the LOCK position, proceed as follows:
function.
1. Move the selector lever into the P (Park)
. If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door position.
or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent
Key may function. 2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position.
3. Open the door. The ignition switch will
change to the LOCK position.
SSD0910 The selector lever can be moved from the P
(Park) position if the ignition switch is in
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH the ON position and the brake pedal is
OPERATION depressed.
When the ignition switch is pushed without If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,
depressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch the push-button ignition switch cannot be
position will change as follows: turned from the LOCK position.
. Push center once to change to ACC. Some indicators and warnings for operation are
displayed on the dot matrix liquid crystal display
. Push center two times to change to ON. between the speedometer and tachometer. (See
. Push center three times to change to OFF. “DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY” in
(No position illuminates.) the “2. Instruments and controls” section.)
. Push center four times to return to ACC. STEERING LOCK (if so equipped)
. Open or close any door to return to LOCK In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it
during the OFF position. must be turned about 1/8 of a right or left turn
from the straight up position.
5-10 Starting and driving
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY DIS- ment. . Make sure the area around the vehicle is
CHARGE clear.
. Make sure the Intelligent Key is in
If the battery of the Intelligent Key is almost the correct direction when inserting . Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-
discharged, the guide light * B of the key port it to the key port. The engine may ant, brake fluid and window washer fluid as
* A blinks and the indicator appears on the dot not start if it is in the incorrect frequently as possible, or at least whenever
matrix liquid crystal display. (See “DOT MATRIX direction. you refuel.
LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY” in the “2. Instru-
ments and controls” section.) . Remove the Intelligent Key from the . Check that all windows and lights are clean.
key port after the ignition switch is . Visually inspect tires for their appearance
In this case, inserting the Intelligent Key into the pushed to the OFF position.
port * A allows you to start the engine. Make
and condition. Also check tires for proper
sure that the key ring side faces backward as inflation.
illustrated. Insert the Intelligent Key in the port . Lock all doors.
until it is latched and secured.
. Position seats and adjust head restraints/
To remove the Intelligent Key from the port, push headrests.
the ignition switch to the OFF position and pull
the Intelligent Key out of the port. . Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
CAUTION
. Never place anything except the
Intelligent Key in the key port. Doing
so may cause damage to the equip-
5-12 Starting and driving
1. Apply the parking brake. the engine with your foot off the CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANS-
accelerator pedal by depressing the MISSION (CVT)
2. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) or N
brake pedal and pushing the push-
(Neutral) position. (P is recommended.) The Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
button ignition switch to start the engine.
The starter is designed not to operate unless If the engine starts, but fails to run, in your vehicle is electronically controlled to
the selector lever is in either of the above repeat the above procedure. produce maximum power and smooth operation.
positions. The recommended operating procedures for this
3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position. CAUTION transmission are shown on the following pages.
Depress the brake pedal and push the Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle
ignition switch to start the engine. Do not operate the starter for more performance and driving enjoyment.
than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine
To start the engine immediately, push and Engine power may be automatically re-
does not start, push the ignition switch
release the ignition switch while depressing duced to protect the CVT if the engine
to OFF and wait 10 seconds before speed increases quickly when driving on
the brake pedal with the ignition switch in cranking again, otherwise the starter
any position. slippery roads or while being tested on
could be damaged. some dynamometers.
. If the engine is very hard to start in
extremely cold weather or when restart- 4. Warm-up Starting the vehicle
ing, depress the accelerator pedal a little Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 1. After starting the engine, fully depress the
(approximately 1/3 to the floor) and seconds after starting. Do not race the foot brake pedal before moving the selector
while holding, crank the engine. Release engine while warming it up. Drive at lever out of the P (Park) position.
the accelerator pedal when the engine moderate speed for a short distance first,
starts. This CVT is designed so that the foot
especially in cold weather. In cold weather, brake pedal must be depressed before
. If the engine is very hard to start keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 - shifting from P (Park) to any driving
because it is flooded, depress the 3 minutes before shutting it off. Starting and position while the ignition switch is in
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor stopping the engine over a short period of the ON position.
and hold it. Push the ignition switch to time may make the vehicle more difficult to
the ON position to start cranking the start. The selector lever cannot be moved out
engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop of the P (Park) position and into any of
5. To stop the engine, shift the selector lever to the other positions if the ignition
cranking by pushing the ignition switch the P (Park) position and push the ignition
to OFF. After cranking the engine, switch is pushed to the LOCK, OFF or
switch to the OFF position. ACC position.
release the accelerator pedal. Crank
Starting and driving 5-13
R (Reverse):
WARNING
Use this position to back up. Make sure the
Apply the parking brake if the selector vehicle is completely stopped before selecting
lever is in any position while the engine the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal
is not running. Failure to do so could must be depressed and the selector lever
cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly button pushed in to move the selector
or roll away and result in serious lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any
driving position to R (Reverse).
personal injury or property damage.
N (Neutral):
PARKING BRAKE
suitable tool.
5. Push the selector lever button *C and move
WARNING
the selector lever to the N (Neutral) position . Be sure the parking brake is fully
*D while holding down the shift lock released before driving. Failure to
release.
do so can cause brake failure and
Push the ignition switch to the ON position to lead to an accident.
unlock the steering wheel (if so equipped). The . Do not release the parking brake
vehicle may be moved to the desired location. from outside the vehicle.
If the battery is discharged completely, the . Do not use the gear shift in place of
steering wheel cannot be unlocked. Do not the parking brake. When parking, be
move the vehicle with the steering wheel locked. sure the parking brake is fully
Replace the removed shift lock release cover engaged.
after the operation. SPA2331
. Do not leave children unattended in
If the selector lever cannot be moved out of the a vehicle. They could release the To apply: Fully depress the parking brake pedal
P (Park) position, have a NISSAN dealer check parking brake and cause an acci- *1 .
the CVT system as soon as possible. dent.
To release:
CRUISE CONTROL
switch and release it. Take your foot off the canceled. To resume the preset speed, push and
accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the release the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch.
set speed. To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one The vehicle will resume the last set cruising
of the following methods: speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH
. To pass another vehicle, depress the
accelerator pedal. When you release the . Depress the accelerator pedal. When the (40 km/h).
pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously vehicle attains the desired speed, push and
set speed. release the SET/COAST switch.
. The vehicle may not maintain the set speed . Push and hold the RESUME/ACCELERATE
on winding or hilly roads. If this happens, switch. When the vehicle attains the desired
drive without the cruise control. speed, release the switch.
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the . Push, then quickly release the RESUME/
following methods: ACCELERATE switch. Each time you do
this, the set speed will increase by about 1
a) Push the CANCEL switch. MPH (1.6 km/h).
b) Tap the brake pedal. To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one
of the following methods:
c) Turn the MAIN switch off. The CRUISE light
will turn off. . Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push the
. If you depress the brake pedal while pushing SET/COAST switch and release it.
the RESUME/ACCELERATE or SET/
COAST switch and reset at the cruising . Push and hold the SET/COAST switch.
speed, the cruise control will disengage. Release the switch when the vehicle slows
Turn the MAIN switch off once and then turn down to the desired speed.
it on again.
. Push, then quickly release the SET/COAST
. The cruise control will automatically cancel if switch. Each time you do this, the set speed
the vehicle slows more than 8 MPH (13 will decrease by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
km/h) below the set speed.
. If you move the selector lever to the N
(Neutral) position, the cruise control will be
Starting and driving 5-19
. Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain . Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.
CAUTION cruising speeds with a constant accelerator (See “ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
position. RECOMMENDATION” in the “9. Technical
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), and consumer information” section.)
. Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.
follow these recommendations to ob-
Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.
tain maximum engine performance and
ensure the future reliability and econo- . Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.
my of your new vehicle. Failure to Keep a safe distance behind other vehicles.
follow these recommendations may . Select a gear range suitable to road condi-
result in shortened engine life and tions.
reduced engine performance.
. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
. Avoid driving for long periods at constant
. Keep your engine tuned up.
speed, either fast or slow. Do not run the
engine over 4,000 rpm. . Follow the recommended periodic mainte-
nance schedule.
. Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.
. Keep the tires inflated to the correct
. Avoid quick starts.
pressure. Low tire pressure increases tire
. Avoid hard braking as much as possible. wear and lowers fuel economy.
. Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles . Keep the wheels in correct alignment.
(800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts Improper alignment increases tire wear and
could be damaged. lowers fuel economy.
. Air conditioner operation lowers fuel econ-
omy. Use the air conditioner only when
necessary.
. When cruising at highway speeds, it is more
economical to use the air conditioner and
leave the windows closed to reduce drag.
LOCK mode
WARNING The AWD LOCK indicator light will
. For AWD equipped vehicles, do not illuminate.
attempt to raise two wheels off the AUTO mode
ground and shift the transmission to The AWD LOCK indicator light will turn off.
any drive or reverse position with
the engine running. Doing so may AWD
result in drivetrain damage or un- AWD LOCK Use condi-
Wheel driven
expected vehicle movement which mode indica- tions
tor light
could result in serious vehicle da-
mage or personal injury. Distribution of tor-
que to the front and
. Do not attempt to test an AWD rear wheels changes
equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dy- SSD0418 automatically, de-
For driving
namometer (such as the dynam- pending on road
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) LOCK Turns on paved
ometers used by some states for AUTO conditions encoun-
off. or slippery
emissions testing) or similar equip- SWITCH OPERATIONS tered
roads
ment even if the other two wheels [100:0] ↔ [50:50].
The AWD LOCK switch located on the lower This results in im-
are raised off the ground. Make sure side of the instrument panel. This switch is used proved driving stabi-
that you inform the test facility to select the AUTO or LOCK mode depending lity.*1
personnel that your vehicle is on the driving conditions.
AWD For driving
equipped with AWD before it is Each time you push the lower part of the switch LOCK All-wheel drive*2, *3 LOCK on rough
placed on a dynamometer. Using *A , the AWD mode will switch: roads
the wrong test equipment may re- AUTO ? LOCK ? AUTO.
sult in drivetrain damage or unex- *1: When the rotation difference between the
pected vehicle movement which front and rear wheels is large, the AWD
could result in serious vehicle da- mode may change from AUTO to LOCK for
mage or personal injury. a while, however, this is not a malfunction.
CAUTION
. If the warning light remains on after
the above operation, have your
vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer
as soon as possible.
. If the warning light comes on while
driving there may be a malfunction
in the AWD system. Reduce the
vehicle speed and have your vehicle
Starting and driving 5-23
PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system determine some action is required to help
action is similar to pumping the brakes very uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs keep the vehicle on the steered path.
quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake and vehicle motion. Under certain driving con-
pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or ditions, the VDC system helps to perform the . You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal
feel a vibration from the actuator when it is following functions. and hear a noise or vibration from under the
operating. This is normal and indicates that the hood. This is normal and indicates that the
. Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel VDC system is working properly.
ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsa-
slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is
tion may indicate that road conditions are
transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on . Adjust your speed and driving to the road
hazardous and extra care is required while conditions.
the same axle.
driving.
. Controls brake pressure and engine output See “Slip indicator light” in the “2. Instruments
to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle and controls” section and “Vehicle Dynamic
speed (traction control function). Control (VDC) off indicator light” in the “2.
Instruments and controls” section.
. Controls brake pressure at individual wheels
and engine output to help the driver maintain If a malfunction occurs in the system, the
control of the vehicle in the following and indicator lights come on in the
conditions: instrument panel. The VDC system automatically
turns off when these indicator lights are on.
— understeer (vehicle tends to not follow the
steered path despite increased steering The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC
input) system. The VDC off indicator illuminates to
indicate the VDC system is off. When the VDC
— oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to switch is used to turn off the system, the VDC
certain road or driving conditions). system still operates to prevent one drive wheel
from slipping by transferring power to a non
The VDC system can help the driver to maintain
slipping drive wheel. The indicator flashes
control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss
if this occurs. All other VDC functions are off and
of vehicle control in all driving situations.
the indicator will not flash. The VDC
When the VDC system operates, the System is automatically reset to on when the
indicator in the instrument panel flashes so note ignition switch is placed in the off position then
the following: back to the on position.
. The road may be slippery or the system may The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature
Starting and driving 5-27
that tests the system each time you start the indicator lights may illuminate. surface.
engine and move the vehicle forward or in
reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test . If brake related parts such as brake . If wheels or tires other than the
occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel pads, rotors and calipers are not NISSAN recommended ones are
a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and NISSAN recommended or are extre- used, the VDC system may not
is not an indication of a malfunction. mely deteriorated, the VDC system operate properly and the in-
may not operate properly and both dicator may flash or both and
WARNING and indicator lights may indicator lights may illuminate.
illuminate. . The VDC system is not a substitute
. The VDC system is designed to help . If engine control related parts are for winter tires or tire chains on a
the driver maintain stability but not NISSAN recommended or are snow covered road.
does not prevent accidents due to extremely deteriorated, both the
abrupt steering operation at high and indicator lights may
speeds or by careless or dangerous illuminate.
driving techniques. Reduce vehicle
. When driving on extremely inclined
speed and be especially careful
surfaces such as higher banked
when driving and cornering on slip-
corners, the VDC system may not
pery surfaces and always drive care-
operate properly and the in-
fully.
dicator may flash or both and
. Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen- indicator lights may illuminate.
sion. If suspension parts such as Do not drive on these types of
shock absorbers, struts, springs, roads.
stabilizer bars, bushings and
. When driving on an unstable sur-
wheels are not NISSAN recom-
face such as a turntable, ferry,
mended for your vehicle or are
elevator or ramp, the indicator
extremely deteriorated the VDC sys-
may flash or both and
tem may not operate properly. This
indicator lights may illuminate. This
could adversely affect vehicle hand-
is not a malfunction. Restart the
ling performance, and the in-
engine after driving onto a stable
dicator may flash or both and
5-28 Starting and driving
will lose even more traction. To use the engine block heater starting the engine. Damage to the
. Allow more stopping distance under 1. Turn the engine off. cord could result in an electrical
these conditions. Braking should be shock and can cause serious injury.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine
started sooner than on dry pave- block heater cord. . Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged
ment. extension cord rated for at least
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a 10A. Plug the extension cord into a
. Allow greater following distances grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord.
on slippery roads. Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) pro-
4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault tected, grounded 110-VAC outlet.
. Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110- Failure to use the proper extension
These may appear on an otherwise
volt AC (VAC) outlet. cord or a grounded outlet can result
clear road in shaded areas. If a
in a fire or electrical shock and
patch of ice is seen ahead, brake 5. The engine block heater must be plugged in
for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on cause serious personal injury.
before reaching it. Try not to brake
while on the ice, and avoid any outside temperatures, to properly warm the
sudden steering maneuvers. engine coolant. Use an appropriate timer to
turn the engine block heater on.
. Do not use cruise control on slip-
pery roads. 6. Before starting the engine, unplug and
properly store the cord to keep it away from
. Snow can trap dangerous exhaust moving parts.
gases under your vehicle. Keep
snow clear of the exhaust pipe and
from around your vehicle.
WARNING
. Do not use your engine block heater
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so with an ungrounded electrical sys-
equipped) tem or a 2-pronged adapter. You can
Engine block heaters are used to assist with be seriously injured by an electrical
cold temperature starting. shock if you use an ungrounded
connection.
The engine block heater should be used when
the outside temperature is 208F (−78C) or lower. . Disconnect and properly store the
engine block heater cord before
5-30 Starting and driving
MEMO
MEMO
6 In case of emergency
FLAT TIRE
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS- could occur and may lead to an the tire pressure sensors.
TEM (TPMS) accident and could result in serious
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure personal injury. Check the tire pres- CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire sure for all four tires. Adjust the tire
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions
pressure of all tires except the spare. When pressure to the recommended COLD below.
the low tire pressure warning light is lit, one or tire pressure shown on the Tire and
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Loading Information label to turn Stopping the vehicle
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire the low tire pressure warning light 1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and
pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you OFF. If the light still illuminates away from traffic.
of it by the low tire pressure warning light. This while driving after adjusting the tire
system will activate only when the vehicle is 2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
pressure, a tire may be flat. If you
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). For have a flat tire, replace it with a 3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking
more details, see “WARNING/INDICATOR brake. Move the selector lever to the P
spare tire as soon as possible.
LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS” in the (Park) position.
“2. Instruments and controls” section and “TIRE . When a spare tire is mounted or a
PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not 4. Turn off the engine.
in the “5. Starting and driving” section. function and the low tire pressure
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic, and to
warning light will flash for approxi-
signal professional road assistance person-
WARNING mately 1 minute. The light will nel that you need assistance.
remain on after 1 minute. Contact
. If the low tire pressure warning light your NISSAN dealer as soon as 6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle
illuminates while driving, avoid sud- possible for tire replacement and/ and stand in a safe place, away from traffic
den steering maneuvers or abrupt or system resetting. and clear of the vehicle.
braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull
. Replacing tires with those not ori-
off the road to a safe location and
ginally specified by NISSAN could WARNING
stop the vehicle as soon as possi-
affect the proper operation of the . Make sure the parking brake is
ble. Driving with under-inflated tires
TPMS. securely applied and the transmis-
may permanently damage the tires
and increase the likelihood of tire . Do not inject any tire liquid or sion is shifted into the P (Park)
failure. Serious vehicle damage aerosol tire sealant into the tires, position.
as this may cause a malfunction of
6-2 In case of emergency
. Never change tires when the vehicle Getting the spare tire and tools
is on a slope, ice or slippery areas. 1. Open the lift gate.
This is hazardous.
2. Remove the cargo cover (if so equipped).
. Never change tires if oncoming (See “CARGO COVER” in the “2. Instru-
traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait ments and controls” section.)
for professional road assistance.
3. Open the cargo floor board.
(See “CARGO FLOOR BOX” in the “2.
Instruments and controls” section.)
MCE0001A
Blocking wheels
Place suitable blocks * 1 at both the front and
back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat
tire to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is
jacked up.
WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the
vehicle may move and result in personal
injury.
4. Type A:
Remove the cargo floor board.
Type B:
Turn the clips counterclockwise and remove
the cargo floor box.
SCE0854 SCE0853
Type A Type B
5. Type B:
Open the cargo floor board.
SCE0715
Type B
6-4 In case of emergency
Jacking up the vehicle and removing the Carefully read the caution label attached
damaged tire to the jack body and the following instruc-
tions.
WARNING
. Never get under the vehicle while it
is supported only by the jack. If it is
necessary to work under the vehicle,
support it with safety stands.
. Use only the jack provided with your
vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use
the jack provided with your vehicle
on other vehicles. The jack is de-
SCE0572
signed for lifting only your vehicle Jack-up point
during a tire change. 1. Place the jack directly under the jack-up
. Use the correct jack-up points. point as illustrated so the top of the jack
Never use any other part of the contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.
vehicle for jack support. Align the jack head between the two
notches in the front or the rear as shown.
. Never jack up the vehicle more than Also fit the groove of the jack head between
necessary. the notches as shown.
. Never use blocks on or under the The jack should be used on level firm
jack. ground.
. Do not start or run the engine while
vehicle is on the jack, as it may
cause the vehicle to move.
. Do not allow passengers to stay in
the vehicle while it is on the jack.
SCE0751 SCE0039
2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by Installing the spare tire
turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut The spare tire is designed for emergency
wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts use. (See specific instructions under the
until the tire is off the ground. heading “WHEELS AND TIRES” in the “8.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.)
3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever
and rod with both hands as shown above. 1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface
Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears between the wheel and hub.
the ground. Remove the wheel nuts, and
then remove the tire. 2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten
the wheel nuts finger tight. Check that all the
wheel nuts contact the wheel surface
horizontally.
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel
nuts alternately and evenly in the sequence
as illustrated (*
1 ,*2 ,* 3 ,* 4 ,* 5 ), more
than 2 times, until they are tight. tened to specifications at each lubrica- spare tire are designed for emer-
tion interval. gency use. See specific instructions
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground. Then, with the wheel . Adjust tire pressure to the COLD under the heading “WHEELS AND
nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely pressure. TIRES” in the “8. Maintenance and
in the sequence as illustrated. Lower the do-it-yourself” section.
vehicle completely. COLD pressure:
After the vehicle has been parked for
WARNING three hours or more or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km).
. Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
COLD tire pressures are shown on the
tightened wheel nuts can cause the Tire and Loading Information label
wheel to become loose or come off. affixed to the driver side center pillar.
This could cause an accident.
. Do not use oil or grease on the Stowing the damaged tire and the tools
wheel studs or nuts. This could 1. Securely store the damaged tire, jack and
cause the nuts to become loose. tools in the storage area.
. Retighten the wheel nuts when the 2. Replace the cargo box.
vehicle has been driven for 600 3. Close the cargo floor board.
miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a
flat tire, etc.). 4. Close the lift gate.
JUMP STARTING
To start your engine with a booster battery, the protectors (for example, goggles or
instructions and precautions below must be industrial safety spectacles) and
followed. remove rings, metal bands, or any
other jewelry. Do not lean over the
WARNING battery when jump starting.
. If done incorrectly, jump starting . Do not attempt to jump start a
can lead to a battery explosion, frozen battery. It could explode
resulting in severe injury or death. and cause serious injury.
It could also damage your vehicle. . Your vehicle has an automatic en-
. Explosive hydrogen gas is always gine cooling fan. It could come on at
present in the vicinity of the battery. any time. Keep hands and other
Keep all sparks and flames away objects away from it.
from the battery. SCE0719
. Do not allow battery fluid to come
into contact with eyes, skin, clothing WARNING
or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is
a corrosive sulfuric acid solution Always follow the instructions below.
which can cause severe burns. If Failure to do so could result in damage
the fluid should come into contact to the charging system and cause
with anything, immediately flush the personal injury.
contacted area with water.
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle
. Keep the battery out of the reach of
children.
* B , position the two vehicles (* A and * B )
to bring their batteries into close proximity to
. The booster battery must be rated at each other.
12 volts. Use of an improperly rated Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.
battery can damage your vehicle.
2. Apply the parking brake. Move the selector
. Whenever working on or near a
lever to the P (Park) position. Switch off all
battery, always wear suitable eye
In case of emergency 6-9
PUSH STARTING
unnecessary electrical systems (lights, hea- and let it run for a few minutes. Do not attempt to start the engine by pushing.
ter, air conditioner, etc.).
6. Keep the engine speed of the booster
3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so vehicle *B at about 2,000 rpm, and start CAUTION
equipped). Cover the battery with a firmly the engine of the vehicle *
A being jump
wrung out moist cloth to reduce explosion started. Continuously Variable Transmission
hazard. (CVT) models cannot be push-started
or tow-started. Attempting to do so may
4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence as CAUTION cause transmission damage.
illustrated (*
1 ? *
2 ? * 3 ? * 4 ).
Do not keep the starter motor engaged
For models with a steering wheel lock for more than 10 seconds. If the engine
mechanism, if the battery is discon- does not start right away, turn the
nected or discharged, the steering ignition switch to the OFF position
wheel will lock and cannot be turned. and wait 10 seconds before trying
Supply power using jumper cables
again.
before pushing the ignition switch and
disengaging the steering lock. 7. After starting your engine, carefully discon-
nect the negative cable and then the positive
CAUTION cable (*4 ? * 3 ? * 2 ? * 1 ).
. Always connect positive (+) to posi- 8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be
tive (+) and negative (−) to body sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover
ground (for example, as illustrated), the vent holes as it may be contaminated
with corrosive acid.
not to the battery.
. Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine
compartment and that the cable
clamps do not contact any other
metal.
3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for 6. After the engine cools down, check the
CAUTION steam or coolant escaping from the radiator coolant level in the reservoir tank with the
before opening the hood. (If steam or engine running. Add coolant to the reservoir
. Do not continue to drive if your coolant is escaping, turn off the engine.) tank if necessary. Have your vehicle repaired
vehicle overheats. Doing so could Do not open the hood further until no steam at a NISSAN dealer.
cause engine damage or a vehicle or coolant can be seen.
fire. 4. Open the engine hood.
. To avoid the danger of being
scalded, never remove the radiator WARNING
cap while the engine is still hot.
When the radiator cap is removed, If steam or water is coming from the
pressurized hot water will spurt out, engine, stand clear to prevent getting
possibly causing serious injury. burned.
. Do not open the hood if steam is
5. Visually check drive belts for damage or
coming out. looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is
running. The radiator hoses and radiator
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an should not leak water. If coolant is leaking,
extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if the water pump belt is missing or loose, or
you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal the cooling fan does not run, stop the
noise, etc., take the following steps: engine.
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply
the parking brake and move the selector WARNING
lever to the P (Park) position.
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
Do not stop the engine.
jewelry or clothing to come into contact
2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the with, or get caught in, engine belts or
windows, move the heater or air conditioner the engine cooling fan. The engine
temperature control to maximum hot and fan cooling fan can start at any time.
control to high speed.
When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in For information about towing your vehicle behind
Canada) and local regulations for towing must a recreational vehicle (RV), see “FLAT TOW-
be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could ING” in the “9. Technical and consumer
damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are information” section of this manual.
available from a NISSAN dealer. Local service
operators are familiar with the applicable laws
and procedures for towing. To assure proper
towing and to prevent accidental damage to
your vehicle, NISSAN recommends that you
have a service operator tow your vehicle. It is
advisable to have the service operator carefully
read the following precautions.
WARNING
. Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
. Never get under your vehicle after it
has been lifted by a tow truck.
CAUTION
. When towing, make sure that the
transmission, axles, steering system
and drivetrain are in working condi-
tion. If any unit is damaged, dollies
must be used.
. Always attach safety chains before
towing.
SCE0439
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
NISSAN
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models
NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be
used when towing your vehicle or place the
vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated.
CAUTION
Never tow AWD models with any of the
wheels on the ground as this may cause
serious and expensive damage to the
drivetrain.
SCE0438
Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models
Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models or backward), as this may cause
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be serious and expensive damage to
towed with the driving (front) wheels off the the drivetrain. If it is necessary to
ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as tow the vehicle with the rear wheels
illustrated. raised, always use towing dollies
For All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models, see “All- under the front wheels.
Wheel Drive (AWD) models” earlier in this . When towing CVT models with the
section. front wheels on towing dollies:
. Push the ignition switch to the
CAUTION ACC or ON position, and secure
. Never tow Continuously Variable the steering wheel in a straight-
Transmission (CVT) models with ahead position with a rope or
the front wheels on the ground or similar device. For models with a
four wheels on the ground (forward steering wheel lock mechanism,
6-14 In case of emergency
SCE0718 CAUTION
Tie down and recovery hook
. Tow chains or cables must be at-
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck tached only to the main structural
vehicle) members of the vehicle or the
recovery hook. Otherwise, the vehi-
WARNING cle body will be damaged.
. Never tow a vehicle using the vehi-
. Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
cle tie downs or recovery hooks.
SCE0717 . Do not spin your tires at high speed.
Front . Always pull the cable straight out
This could cause them to explode
from the front of the vehicle. Never
and result in serious injury. Parts of
pull on the vehicle at an angle.
your vehicle could also overheat
and be damaged. . Pulling devices should be routed so
they do not touch any part of the
suspension, steering, brake or cool-
ing systems.
In case of emergency 6-15
CLEANING EXTERIOR
In order to maintain the appearance of your Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,
vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it. CAUTION hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to
the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas
To protect the paint surface, wash your vehicle . Do not use car washes that use acid must be regularly cleaned. Make sure that the
as soon as you can: in the detergent. Some car washes, drain holes in the lower edge of the door are
. after a rainfall to prevent possible damage especially brushless ones, use some open. Spray water under the body and in the
from acid rain acid for cleaning. The acid may react wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away
with some plastic vehicle compo- road salt.
. after driving on coastal roads
nents, causing them to crack. This Avoid leaving water spots on the paint surface
. when contaminants such as soot, bird could affect their appearance, and by using a damp chamois to dry the vehicle.
droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs also could cause them not to func-
get on the paint surface tion properly. Always check with WAXING
. when dust or mud builds up on the surface your car wash to confirm that acid Regular waxing protects the paint surface and
is not used. helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle
. Do not wash the vehicle with strong is recommended to remove built-up wax residue
inside a garage or in a covered area. and to avoid a weathered appearance before
household soap, strong chemical
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a detergents, gasoline or solvents. reapplying wax.
shady area or protect the vehicle with a body
. Do not wash the vehicle in direct A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the
cover. proper product.
sunlight or while the vehicle body is
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface hot, as the surface may become . Wax your vehicle only after a thorough
when putting on or removing the body water-spotted. washing. Follow the instructions supplied
cover.
. Avoid using tight-napped or rough with the wax.
WASHING cloths, such as washing mitts. Care . Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,
must be taken when removing cutting compounds or cleaners that may
Wash dirt off the vehicle with a wet sponge and caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-
plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly damage the vehicle finish.
stances so the paint surface is not
using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or Machine compound or aggressive polishing on a
general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with scratched or damaged.
base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the
clean, lukewarm (never hot) water. finish or leave swirl marks.
Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of clean
water.
7-2 Appearance and care
CLEANING INTERIOR
Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior and damaging to the leather sur- FLOOR MATS
trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum faces and should be removed
cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and The use of NISSAN floor mats can extend the
promptly. Do not use saddle soap, life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to
leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dam-
pened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning clean the interior. No matter what mats are
with a dry soft cloth. fluids, solvents, detergents or am- used, be sure they are fitted for your
monia-based cleaners as they may vehicle and are properly positioned in the
Regular care and cleaning is required in order to damage the leather’s natural finish. footwell to prevent interference with pedal
maintain the appearance of the leather. operation. Mats should be maintained with
. Only use fabric protectors approved regular cleaning and replaced if they become
Before using any fabric protector, read the by NISSAN. excessively worn.
manufacturer’s recommendations. Some fabric
. Do not use glass or plastic cleaner
protectors contain chemicals that may stain or
bleach the seat material. on meter or gauge lens covers. It
may damage the lens cover.
Use a cloth dampened only with water, to clean
the meter and gauge lens. AIR FRESHENERS
Most air fresheners use a solvent that could
WARNING affect the vehicle interior. If you use an air
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot freshener, take the following precautions:
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can . Hanging-type air fresheners can cause
damage the seat or occupant classifica- permanent discoloration when they contact
tion sensor. This can also affect the vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air
operation of the air bag system and freshener in a location that allows it to hang
result in serious personal injury. free and not contact an interior surface.
. Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on
the vents. These products can cause
CAUTION immediate damage and discoloration when
spilled on interior surfaces.
. Never use benzine, thinner, or any
similar material. Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s
. Small dirt particles can be abrasive instructions before using air fresheners.
7-4 Appearance and care
CORROSION PROTECTION
CAUTION
. NEVER remove dirt, sand or other
debris from the passenger compart-
ment by washing it out with a hose.
Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
. Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electronic
components inside the vehicle as
Your new NISSAN has been designed to have Performing general maintenance checks re- During the normal day-to-day operation of the
minimum maintenance requirements with long quires minimal mechanical skill and only a few vehicle, general maintenance should be per-
service intervals to save you both time and general automotive tools. formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If
money. However, some day-to-day and regular you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or
maintenance is essential to maintain your These checks or inspections can be done by smell, be sure to check for the cause or have a
NISSAN’s fine mechanical condition, as well yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, a NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you
as its emission and engine performance. NISSAN dealer. should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that
repairs are required.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE
the scheduled maintenance, as well as general When performing any checks or maintenance
If maintenance service is required or your vehicle
maintenance, is performed. work, see “MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS”
appears to malfunction, have the systems
later in this section.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who checked and serviced by a NISSAN dealer.
can ensure that your vehicle receives the proper EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCE
NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists
maintenance. You are a vital link in the main- ITEMS
and are kept up-to-date with the latest service
tenance chain.
information through technical bulletins, service Additional information on the following
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE tips, and in-dealership information systems. items with “*” is found later in this section.
They are completely qualified to work on
For your convenience, both required and op- NISSAN vehicles before work begins. Outside the vehicle
tional scheduled maintenance items are de-
You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s The maintenance items listed here should be
scribed and listed in your “NISSAN Service and
service department performs the best job to performed from time to time, unless otherwise
Maintenance Guide”. You must refer to that
meet the maintenance requirements on your specified.
guide to ensure that necessary maintenance is
performed on your NISSAN at regular intervals. vehicle — in a reliable and economical way. Doors and engine hood: Check that all doors
and the engine hood operate properly. Also
GENERAL MAINTENANCE ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate
General maintenance includes those items hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links if
which should be checked during normal day- necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch
to-day operation. They are essential for proper keeps the hood from opening when the primary
vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to latch is released.
perform these procedures regularly as pre- When driving in areas using road salt or other
scribed. corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis. For additional information regarding tires, refer Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or P (Park) position mechanism: On a fairly
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the War- steep hill, check that the vehicle is held securely
operating properly and installed securely. Also ranty Information Booklet. with the selector lever in the P (Park) position
check headlight aim. without applying any brakes.
Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking basis. Check the windshield at least every six Parking brake: Check the parking brake
the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing, months for cracks or other damage. Have a operation regularly. The vehicle should be
and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if damaged windshield repaired by a qualified securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the
necessary. repair facility. parking brake applied. If the parking brake needs
adjustment, see a NISSAN dealer.
Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks
7,500 miles (12,000 km). or wear if they do not wipe properly. Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt
system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters
Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often Inside the vehicle and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,
and always prior to long distance trips. If The maintenance items listed here should be and are installed securely. Check the belt
necessary, adjust the pressure in all tires, checked on a regular basis, such as when webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.
including the spare, to the pressure specified. performing scheduled maintenance, cleaning
Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive the vehicle, etc. Seats: Check seat position controls such as
wear. seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure
Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for they operate smoothly and that all latches lock
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) smooth operation and make sure the pedal securely in every position. Check that the head
transmitter components: Replace the TPMS does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep restraints/headrests move up and down
transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap the floor mat away from the pedal. smoothly and that the locks (if so equipped)
when the tires are replaced due to wear or age. hold securely in all latched positions.
Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth
Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes Steering wheel: Check for changes in the
should pull to either side while driving on a down further than normal, the pedal feels steering conditions, such as excessive free play,
straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to hard steering or strange noises.
abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for stop, see a NISSAN dealer immediately. Keep
wheel alignment. the floor mat away from the pedal. Warning lights and chimes: Make sure that
all warning lights and chimes are operating
If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the properly.
highway speeds, wheel balancing may be vehicle to one side when applied.
needed.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3
Windshield defroster: Check that the air Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly
comes out of the defroster outlets properly and supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the flushed with plain water, being careful to clean
in sufficient quantity when operating the heater exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of those areas where mud and dirt may accumu-
or air conditioner. exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust late. For additional information, see “CLEANING
system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. (See EXTERIOR” in the “7. Appearance and care”
Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that “PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND section.
the wipers and washer operate properly and that DRIVING” in the “5. Starting and driving”
the wipers do not streak. section for exhaust gas (carbon monoxide).) Windshield washer fluid*: Check that there is
adequate fluid in the reservoir.
Under the hood and vehicle Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel,
The maintenance items listed here should be oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has
checked periodically (for example, each time you been parked for a while. Water dripping from the
check the engine oil or refuel). air conditioner after use is normal. If you should
notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,
Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell. check for the cause and have it corrected
It should be between the MAX and MIN lines. immediately.
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under
severe condition require frequent checks of the Power steering fluid level* and lines: Check
battery fluid level. the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine
off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,
Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake cracks, etc.
fluid level is between the MAX and MIN lines on
the reservoir. Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,
Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the
when the engine is cold. hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose
Engine drive belts*: Make sure that the drive connections.
belts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily. Underbody: The underbody is frequently ex-
Engine oil level*: Check the level after parking posed to corrosive substances such as those
the vehicle on a level surface and turning off the used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very
engine. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to important to remove these substances, other-
drain back into the oil pan. wise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel
lines and around the exhaust system. At the end
8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or mainte- enclosed space such as a garage, be . Never leave the engine or the CVT
nance work on your vehicle, always take care sure there is proper ventilation for related component harnesses dis-
to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or exhaust gases to escape. connected while the ignition switch
damage to the vehicle. The following are general
precautions which should be closely observed. . Never get under the vehicle while it is in the ON position.
is supported only by a jack. If it is . Never connect or disconnect the
WARNING necessary to work under the vehicle, battery or any transistorized com-
support it with safety stands. ponent while the ignition switch is
. Park the vehicle on a level surface, . Keep smoking materials, flame and in the ON position.
apply the parking brake securely sparks away from fuel tank and the . Your vehicle is equipped with an
and block the wheels to prevent battery. automatic engine cooling fan. It may
the vehicle from moving. Move the come on at any time without warn-
. The fuel filter or fuel lines should be
selector lever to P (Park). ing, even if the ignition key is in the
serviced by a NISSAN dealer be-
. Be sure the ignition switch is in the cause the fuel lines are under high OFF position and the engine is not
OFF or LOCK position when per- pressure even when the engine is running. To avoid injury, always
forming any parts replacement or off. disconnect the negative battery
repairs. cable before working near the fan.
. If you must work with the engine
CAUTION This “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section
running, keep your hands, clothing,
gives instructions regarding only those items
hair and tools away from moving
. Do not work under the hood while which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.
fans, belts and any other moving
the engine is hot. Turn the engine A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is also
parts.
off and wait until it cools down. available. (See “OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE
. It is advisable to secure or remove
. Avoid direct contact with used en- MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION” in the “9.
any loose clothing and remove any Technical and consumer information” section.)
gine oil and coolant. Improperly
jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc.
disposed engine oil, and engine You should be aware that incomplete or
before working on your vehicle.
coolant and/or other vehicle fluids improper servicing may result in operating
. Always wear eye protection when- can damage the environment. Al- difficulties or excessive emissions, and could
ever you work on your vehicle. ways conform to local regulations affect warranty coverage. If in doubt about
. If you must run the engine in an for disposal of vehicle fluid. any servicing, we recommend that it be
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5
SDI2172
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized
with a high-quality, year-round, anti-freeze cool- or distilled water. The use of other
ant solution. The anti-freeze solution contains
types of coolant solutions may damage
rust and corrosion inhibitors, therefore additional
cooling system additives are not necessary. the engine cooling system.
Outside Deminera-
WARNING temperature lized water
down to Anti-freeze
. Never remove the radiator or cool- or distilled
ant reservoir cap when the engine is 8F 8C water
hot. Wait until the engine and −30 −35 50% 50%
radiator cool down. Serious burns
could be caused by high pressure
fluid escaping from the radiator.
SDI2173
See precautions in “IF YOUR VEHI-
CLE OVERHEATS” in the “6. In case CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
of emergency” section of this man-
ual. Check the coolant level in the reservoir when
the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below
. The radiator is equipped with a the MIN level * 2 , open the reservoir cap and
pressure type radiator cap. To pre- add coolant up to the MAX level * 1 . If the
vent engine damage, use only a reservoir is empty, check the coolant level in the
genuine NISSAN radiator cap. radiator when the engine is cold. If there is
insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator
with coolant up to the filler opening and also add
CAUTION it to the reservoir up to the MAX level * 1 .
ENGINE OIL
CAUTION
Make sure the correct lifting and sup-
port points are used to avoid vehicle
damage.
SDI2175 SDI2355
8. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a slight minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.
CAUTION resistance is felt, then tighten additionally Add engine oil if necessary.
more than 2/3 turn.
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the Oil filter tightening torque: After the operation
engine oil is hot. 11 to 15 ft-lb (14.7 to 20.5 N·m) 1. Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground.
9. Install the plastic cover. 2. Dispose of waste oil and filter properly.
. Waste oil must be disposed of
properly. 10. Clean and re-install the drain plug with a
. Check your local regulations.
new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug WARNING
with a wrench.
Perform steps 4 to 9 when the engine oil Drain plug tightening torque: . Prolonged and repeated contact
filter change is needed. 22 to 29 ft-lb (29 to 39 N·m) with used engine oil may cause skin
cancer.
4. Remove the plastic cover over the oil filter Do not use excessive force.
location by removing the small plastic clips . Try to avoid direct skin contact with
as illustrated. 11. Refill engine with recommended oil through used oil. If skin contact is made,
the oil filler opening, and install the oil filler wash thoroughly with soap or hand
5. Loosen the oil filter *
C with an oil filter cap securely. cleaner as soon as possible.
wrench. Remove the oil filter by turning it by
hand. See “CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED . Keep used engine oil out of reach of
FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the “9. Technical children.
6. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface and consumer information” section for drain
with a clean rag. and refill capacity. The drain and refill
capacity depends on the oil temperature
CAUTION and drain time. Use these specifications for
reference only. Always use the dipstick to
Be sure to remove any old gasket determine the proper amount of oil in the
material remaining on the mounting engine.
surface of the engine. Failure to do so 12. Start the engine and check for leakage
could lead to engine damage. around the drain plug and the oil filter.
Correct as required.
7. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean
engine oil. 13. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10
8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
POWER STEERING FLUID
TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID
CAUTION CAUTION
. Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid . Do not overfill.
NS-2. Do not mix with other fluids. . Use Genuine NISSAN PSF or
. Using transmission fluid other than equivalent.
Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2
will damage the CVT, which is not
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle
limited warranty.
WARNING
. Use only new fluid from a sealed
container. Old, inferior or contami-
nated fluid may damage the brake
system. The use of improper fluids
can damage the brake system and
affect the vehicle’s stopping ability.
. Clean the filler cap before removing. SDI2178 SDI2179
. Brake fluid is poisonous and should Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid is Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodi-
be stored carefully in marked con- below the MIN line * 2 or the brake warning cally. Add window washer fluid when the low
tainers out of the reach of children. light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Super window washer fluid warning light illuminates.
Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3
fluid up to the MAX line * 1 . If fluid must be To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift the
CAUTION added frequently, the system should be checked cap and pour the window washer fluid into the
by a NISSAN dealer. reservoir opening.
Do not spill the fluid on any painted Add a washer solvent to the water for better
surfaces. This will damage the paint. If cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield
fluid is spilled, immediately wash the washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s
surface with water. instructions for the mixture ratio.
Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving
conditions require an increased amount of
window washer fluid.
BATTERY
Recommended fluid: . Keep the battery surface clean and dry. . When working on or near a battery,
Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concen- Clean the battery with a solution of baking always wear suitable eye protection
trate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent soda and water.
and remove all jewelry.
. Make certain the terminal connections are . Battery posts, terminals and related
CAUTION clean and securely tightened. accessories contain lead and lead
. Do not substitute engine anti-freeze . If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or compounds. Wash hands after
coolant for window washer solution. longer, disconnect the negative (−) battery handling.
This may result in damage to the terminal cable to prevent discharging it. . Keep the battery out of the reach of
paint. children.
. Do not fill the window washer WARNING
reservoir tank with washer fluid . Do not expose the battery to flames
concentrates at full strength. Some or electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas
methyl alcohol based washer fluid generated by the battery is explo-
concentrates may permanently stain sive. Do not allow battery fluid to
the grille if spilled while filling the contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or
window washer reservoir tank. painted surfaces. After touching a
. Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates battery or battery cap, do not touch
with water to the manufacturer’s or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash
recommended levels before pouring your hands. If the acid contacts your
the fluid into the window washer eyes, skin or clothing, immediately
reservoir tank. Do not use the flush with water for at least 15
window washer reservoir tank to minutes and seek medical attention.
mix the washer fluid concentrate . Do not operate the vehicle if the
and water. fluid in the battery is low. Low
battery fluid can cause a higher load
on the battery which can generate
heat, reduce battery life, and in
some cases lead to an explosion.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13
JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, see “JUMP
STARTING” in the “6. In case of emergency”
section. If the engine does not start by jump
starting, the battery may have to be replaced.
Contact a NISSAN dealer.
DI0137MA SDI1480C
Check the fluid level in each cell. (Remove the 1. Remove the cell plugs *
A .
battery cover if it is necessary.) It should be
between the UPPER LEVEL * 1 and LOWER
2. Add distilled water up to the UPPER LEVEL
LEVEL * 2 lines. *1 line.
If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled If the side of the battery is not clear, check
water to bring the level to the indicator in each the distilled water level by looking directly
filler opening. Do not overfill. above the cell; the condition * 1 indicates
OK and the conditions * 2 needs more to
be added.
3. Tighten cell plugs *
A .
WARNING
Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF
or LOCK position before servicing drive
belt. The engine could rotate unexpect-
edly.
WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch
are off and that the parking brake is
engaged securely.
CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to
remove the spark plugs. An incorrect
socket can damage the spark plugs.
SDI2020 SDI2180
If replacement is required, see a NISSAN dealer The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and
for servicing. reused. Replace it according to the maintenance
log shown in the “NISSAN Service and Main-
Iridium-tipped spark plugs tenance Guide”. When replacing the filter, wipe
It is not necessary to replace the platinum- the inside of the air cleaner housing and the
tipped spark plugs as frequently as the conven- cover with a damp cloth.
tional type spark plugs since they will last much
longer. Follow the maintenance log shown in the WARNING
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do
not reuse spark plugs by cleaning or regapping. . Operating the engine with the air
Always replace spark plugs with recom- cleaner removed can cause you or
mended or equivalent ones. others to be burned. The air cleaner
not only cleans the air, it stops
flame if the engine backfires. If it
CAUTION
Worn windshield wiper blades can
damage the windshield and impair
driver vision.
SDI2048
REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
CAUTION
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield. . After wiper blade replacement, re-
turn the wiper arm to its original
2. Push and hold the release tab *A , and position; otherwise it may be da-
move the wiper blade down the wiper arm maged when the hood is opened.
*1 .
. Make sure the wiper blades contact SDI2199
3. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper the glass; otherwise the arm may be Be careful not to clog the washer nozzle * A .
arm until a click sounds. damaged from wind pressure. This may cause improper windshield washer
4. Rotate the wiper blade so that the dimple is operation. If the nozzle is clogged, remove any
in the groove. objects with a needle or small pin * B . Be
careful not to damage the nozzle.
Contact a NISSAN dealer for wiper blade rubber
replacement.
Contact a NISSAN dealer if checking or If the brakes do not operate properly, have the affect the function or performance of the brake
replacement is required. brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer. system.
SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES Proper brake inspection intervals should
be followed. For additional information, see the
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting maintenance log section of your “NISSAN
brakes. Service and Maintenance Guide”.
The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the
brake pedal is applied.
WARNING
See a NISSAN dealer for a brake
system check if the brake pedal height
does not return to normal.
FUSES
SDI2181 SDI1754
BATTERY REPLACEMENT
CAUTION
Be careful not to allow children to
swallow the battery and removed parts.
SDI2196
LIGHTS
SDI2182
*
A High-beam bulb
*
B Low-beam bulb
SDI2183
Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C, D, E or F.
When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens
and/or cover.
SDI2200
Side marker light (Halogen headlight model)
1. Remove the rubber cover. (See “HEAD-
LIGHTS” earlier in this section.)
2. Remove the bulb as illustrated.
SDI1679
SDI2030 SDI1500B
Front map light Cargo light
SDI2184
Front fog light (if so equipped)
SDI2031 SDI2032
Rear personal light Vanity mirror light
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29
If you have a flat tire, see “FLAT TIRE” in and Loading Information label is affixed to not load your vehicle beyond
the “6. In case of emergency” section. the driver side center pillar. Tire pressures this capacity. Overloading your
TIRE PRESSURE should be checked regularly because: vehicle may result in reduced
. Most tires naturally lose air over time. tire life, unsafe operating condi-
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) tions due to premature tire fail-
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure . Tires can lose air suddenly when driven ure, or unfavorable handling
Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire over potholes or other objects or if the characteristics and could also
pressure of all tires except the spare. When vehicle strikes a curb while parking. lead to a serious accident. Load-
the low tire pressure warning light is lit, one or
The tire pressures should be checked ing beyond the specified capa-
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
when the tires are cold. The tires are city may also result in failure of
The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is other vehicle components.
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h).
considered COLD after the vehicle has
been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven . Before taking a long trip, or
Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop
in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate whenever you heavily load your
driving). speeds. vehicle, use a tire pressure
gauge to ensure that the tire
For more details, see “Low tire pressure warning Incorrect tire pressure, including un- pressures are at the specified
light” in the “2. Instruments and controls” der inflation, may adversely affect tire level.
section, “TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS- life and vehicle handling.
TEM (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting and driving” . For additional information re-
section and “TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING garding tires, refer to “Important
SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “6. In case of WARNING Tire Safety Information” (US) or
emergency” section. “Tire Safety Information” (Cana-
. Improperly inflated tires can fail
Tire inflation pressure suddenly and cause an accident. da) in the Warranty Information
Booklet.
Check the pressure of the tires (including . The Gross Vehicle Weight rating
the spare) often and always prior to long (GVWR) is located on the F.M.V.
distance trips. The recommended tire S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification la-
pressure specifications are shown on the bel. The vehicle weight capacity
Tire and Loading Information label under is indicated on the Tire and
the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire Loading Information label. Do
8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
*
3 Original size: The size of the tires
originally installed on the vehicle at
the factory.
*
4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to
this pressure when the tires are cold.
Tires are considered COLD after the
vehicle has been parked for 3 or
more hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The
recommended cold tire inflation is set
by the manufacturer to provide the
best balance of tire wear, vehicle
handling, driveability, tire noise, etc.,
up to the vehicle’s GVWR.
*
5 Tire size — see “TIRE LABELING”
later in this section.
*
6 Spare tire size or compact spare tire
SDI2197 size (if so equipped)
*
3 Tire ply composition and material
*
7 The word “radial”
The word “radial” is shown, if the tire
The number of layers or plies of
has radial structure.
rubber-coated fabric in the tire.
Tire manufacturers also must indicate *
8 Manufacturer or brand name
SDI1607 the materials in the tire, which include Manufacturer or brand name is
Example steel, nylon, polyester, and others. shown.
*
2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a
*
4 Maximum permissible inflation pres-
new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX sure Other tire-related terminology:
XXXX) In addition to the many terms that are
This number is the greatest amount
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Department of air pressure that should be put in defined throughout this section, Intended
of Transportation”. The symbol can be the tire. Do not exceed the maximum Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that
placed above, below or to the left or contains a whitewall, bears white lettering
permissible inflation pressure.
right of the Tire Identification Number. or bears manufacturer, brand and/or model
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s identifi- *
5 Maximum load rating name molding that is higher or deeper than
cation mark This number indicates the maximum the same molding on the other sidewall of
load in kilograms and pounds that the tire, or (2) the outward facing sidewall
3. Two-digit code: Tire size of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular
can be carried by the tire. When
4. Three-digit code: Tire type code (Op- replacing the tires on the vehicle, side that must always face outward when
tional) always use a tire that has the same mounted on a vehicle.
TYPES OF TIRES All season tires Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the
NISSAN specifies all season tires on some tire.
WARNING models to provide good performance all year, If you install snow tires, they must be the same
including snowy and icy road conditions. All size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all
. When changing or replacing tires, Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON four wheels.
be sure all four tires are of the same and/or M&S (Mud and Snow) on the tire
sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction For additional traction on icy roads, studded
type (Example: Summer, All Season
than All Season tires and may be more appro- tires may be used. However, some U.S. states
or Snow) and construction. A and Canadian provinces prohibit their use.
NISSAN dealer may be able to help priate in some areas.
Check local, state and provincial laws before
you with information about tire type, Summer tires installing studded tires. Skid and traction cap-
size, speed rating and availability. NISSAN specifies summer tires on some abilities of studded snow tires, on wet or dry
. Replacement tires may have a lower models to provide superior performance on dry surfaces, may be poorer than that of non-
speed rating than the factory roads. Summer tire performance is substantially studded snow tires.
equipped tires, and may not match reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not
have the tire traction rating M&S on the tire
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models
the potential maximum vehicle
speed. Never exceed the maximum sidewall.
speed rating of the tire.
CAUTION
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or
. Replacing tires with those not ori- icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of . Always use tires of the same type,
ginally specified by NISSAN could SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four size, brand, construction (bias, bias-
affect the proper operation of the wheels. belted or radial), and tread pattern
TPMS. Snow tires on all four wheels. Failure to do so
. For additional information regard- may result in a circumference differ-
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select
ing tires, refer to “Important Tire tires equivalent in size and load rating to the ence between tires on the front and
Safety Information” (US) or “Tire original equipment tires. If you do not, it can rear axles which will cause exces-
Safety Information” (Canada) in the adversely affect the safety and handling of your sive tire wear and may damage the
Warranty Information Booklet. vehicle. transmission, transfer case and dif-
ferential gears.
Generally, snow tires will have lower speed
ratings than factory equipped tires and may not
match the potential maximum vehicle speed.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35
. ONLY use spare tires specified for fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully
the AWD model. loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In
addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise,
If excessive tire wear is found, it is recom- your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle
mended that all four tires be replaced with tires handling and performance may be adversely
of the same size, brand, construction and tread affected.
pattern. The tire pressure and wheel alignment Tire chains must be installed only on the
should also be checked and corrected as front wheels and not on the rear wheels.
necessary. Contact a NISSAN dealer.
Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE
TIRE CHAINS ONLY spare tire.
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with
to location. Check the local laws before instal- tire chains in such conditions can cause damage
ling tire chains. When installing tire chains, make to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to SDI1662
sure they are the proper size for the tires on your some overstress.
vehicle and are installed according to the chain CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE
Class S chains. Class “S” chains are used on Tire rotation
vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance. NISSAN recommends rotating the tires
Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are
designed to meet the SAE standard minimum
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). (See “FLAT
clearances between the tire and the closest TIRE” in the “6. In case of emergency”
vehicle suspension or body component required section for tire replacing procedures.)
to accommodate the use of a winter traction
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel
device (tire chains or cables). The minimum
clearances are determined using the factory nuts to the specified torque with a
equipped tire size. Other types may damage torque wrench.
your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when re-
commended by the tire chain manufacturer to
ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire
chain must be secured or removed to prevent
the possibility of whipping action damage to the
8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
. Clean the inner side of the wheels when the . Drive carefully while the TEMPOR- the spare tire as soon as the tread
wheel is changed or the underside of the ARY USE ONLY spare tire is in- wear indicators appear.
vehicle is washed. stalled. Avoid sharp turns and . Do not use the spare tire on other
. Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing abrupt braking while driving. vehicles.
the wheels. . Periodically check spare tire infla- . Do not use more than one spare tire
. Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or tion pressure. Always keep the at the same time.
corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of pressure of the TEMPORARY USE
. Do not tow a trailer while the
pressure or poor seal at the tire bead. ONLY spare tire at 60 psi (420 kPa,
TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire
4.2 bar). Always keep the pressure
. NISSAN recommends that the road wheels is installed.
of the full size spare tire (if so
be waxed to protect against road salt in
areas where it is used during winter. equipped) at the recommended
pressure for standard tires, as in-
Spare tire dicated on the Tire and Loading
CAUTION
When a spare tire is mounted (TEMPORARY Information label. . Do not use tire chains on a TEM-
USE ONLY or conventional), the TPMS will not . With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY PORARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire
function. spare tire installed do not drive your chains will not fit properly and may
Observe the following precautions if the TEM- vehicle at speeds faster than 50 cause damage to the vehicle.
PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used, MPH (80 km/h). . Because the TEMPORARY USE
otherwise your vehicle could be damaged or . When driving on roads covered with ONLY spare tire is smaller than the
involved in an accident. snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE original tire, ground clearance is
ONLY spare tire should be used on reduced. To avoid damage to the
WARNING the rear wheels and original tire vehicle, do not drive over obstacles.
used on the front wheels (drive Also do not drive the vehicle
. The TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare wheels). Use tire chains only on through an automatic car wash
tire should be used for emergency the front (original) tires. since it may get caught.
use. It should be replaced with the
standard tire at the first opportunity . Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE
to avoid possible tire or differential ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster
damage. rate than the standard tire. Replace
MEMO
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure
instructed in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Capacity (Approximate) Recommended specifications
FUEL RECOMMENDATION Gasoline specifications . The fuel should be unleaded and have
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets an octane rating no lower than that
NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded
the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) speci- recommended for unleaded gasoline.
premium gasoline with an octane rating of at
least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Re- fications where it is available. Many of the . If an oxygenate-blend, other than
search octane number 98). automobile manufacturers developed this spe- methanol blend is used, it should
cification to improve emission control system contain no more than 10% oxygenate.
If unleaded premium gasoline is not available, and vehicle performance. Ask your service (MTBE may, however, be added up to
you may use unleaded regular gasoline with an station manager if the gasoline meets the 15%.)
octane rating of at least 87 AKI number WWFC specifications.
(Research octane number 91), but you may . If a methanol blend is used, it should
notice a decrease in performance. Reformulated gasoline contain no more than 5% methanol
Some fuel suppliers are now producing refor- (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol) . It
CAUTION mulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially should also contain a suitable amount
designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN of appropriate cosolvents and corro-
. Using a fuel other than that speci- supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug- sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-
fied could adversely affect the emis- gests that you use reformulated gasoline when lated with appropriate cosolvents and
sion control system, and may also available. corrosion inhibitors, such methanol
blends may cause fuel system damage
affect warranty coverage.
Gasoline containing oxygenates and/or vehicle performance problems.
. Under no circumstances should a Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing At this time, sufficient data is not
leaded gasoline be used, because oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and metha- available to ensure that all methanol
this will damage the three-way cat- nol with or without advertising their presence. blends are suitable for use in NISSAN
alyst. NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels vehicles.
. Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. of which the oxygenate content and the fuel If any driveability problems such as engine
Your vehicle is not designed to run compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily stalling and difficult hot-starting are experienced
on E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can determined. If in doubt, ask your service station after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately
manager. change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a
damage the fuel system compo-
nents and is not covered by the If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take low blend of MTBE.
NISSAN new vehicle limited war- the following precautions as the usage of such Take care not to spill gasoline during
ranty. fuels may cause vehicle performance problems refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates
and/or fuel system damage. can cause paint damage.
Technical and consumer information 9-3
E-85 fuel the condition. Failure to correct the condi- . U.S. government regulations require
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel tion is misuse of the vehicle, for which ethanol dispensing pumps to be
ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can NISSAN is not responsible. identified by a small, square, orange
only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do Incorrect ignition timing will result in spark and black label with the common
not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. U.S. govern- knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may abbreviation or the appropriate per-
ment regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing cause excessive fuel consumption or engine centage for that region.
pumps to be identified by a small, square, damage. If any of the above symptoms are
orange and black label with the common encountered, have your vehicle checked at a
abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for NISSAN dealer.
that region.
However, now and then you may notice
Aftermarket fuel additives light spark knock for a short time while
NISSAN does not recommend the use of any accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a
aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel cause for concern, because you get the
injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve greatest fuel benefit when there is light
deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commer- spark knock for a short time under heavy
cially. Many of these additives intended for gum, engine load.
varnish or deposit removal may contain active
solvent or similar ingredients that can be harmful CAUTION
to the fuel system and engine.
. Your vehicle is not designed to run
Octane rating tips on E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane vehicle not specifically designed for
rating lower than recommended can cause E-85 fuel can damage fuel system
persistent, heavy “spark knock”. (Spark components and is not covered by
knock is a metallic rapping noise.) If
the NISSAN new vehicle limited
severe, this can lead to engine damage. If
you detect a persistent heavy spark knock warranty.
even when using gasoline of the stated . E-85 is a mixture of approximately
octane rating, or if you hear steady spark 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded
knock while holding a steady speed on gasoline.
level roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct
9-4 Technical and consumer information
Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes
with temperature. Because of this, it is important
to select the engine oil viscosity based on the
temperatures at which the vehicle will be
operated before the next oil change. Choosing
an oil viscosity other than that recommended
could cause serious engine damage.
Selecting the correct oil filter
Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a
high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When
replacing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its
equivalent for the reason described in “Change
STI0505 intervals”.
1. API certification mark tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval Change intervals
2. API service symbol Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis- The oil and oil filter change intervals for your
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RE- cosity standard. These oils have the API engine are based on the use of the specified
certification mark on the front of the container. quality oils and filters. Using an engine oil and
COMMENDATION Oils which do not have the specified quality filter other than the specified quality, or exceed-
Selecting the correct oil label should not be used as they could cause ing recommended oil and filter change intervals
It is essential to choose the correct grade, engine damage. could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine
quality, and viscosity engine oil to ensure Oil additives caused by improper maintenance or use of
satisfactory engine life and performance, see incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is
“CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/ NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited
LUBRICANTS” earlier in this section. NISSAN additives. The use of an oil additive is not warranty.
recommends the use of an energy conserving oil necessary when the proper oil type is used and
maintenance intervals are followed. Your engine was filled with a high quality engine
in order to improve fuel economy.
oil when it was built. You do not have to change
Select only engine oils that meet the American Oil which may contain foreign matter or has the oil before the first recommended change
Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna- been previously used should not be used. interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend
Technical and consumer information 9-5
CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil
will cause severe damage to the air
conditioning system and will require
the replacement of all air conditioner
9-6 Technical and consumer information
SPECIFICATIONS
WHEN TRAVELING OR
REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
ANOTHER COUNTRY
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS When planning to travel in another coun-
try, you should first find out if the fuel available is
Overall length in (mm) 188.5 (4,788) suitable for your vehicle’s engine.
Overall width in (mm) 74.1 (1,883) Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low
Overall height with- may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles
in (mm) 67.0 (1,703)
out roof rack rail must be operated with unleaded gasoline.
Overall height with Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas
in (mm) 68.1 (1,729)
roof rack rail where appropriate fuel is not available.
Front tread in (mm) 63.4 (1,610) When transferring the registration of your
Rear tread in (mm) 63.4 (1,610) vehicle to another country, state, province
Wheelbase in (mm) 111.2 (2,825) or district, it may be necessary to modify the
Gross vehicle weight vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.
lb (kg)
rating The laws and regulations for motor vehicle
See the F.M.V.S.S. STI0334
Gross axle weight
certification label
emission control and safety standards vary
rating according to the country, state, province or
on the driver’s side VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Front lb (kg) lock pillar. district; therefore, vehicle specifications may (VIN) PLATE
differ.
Rear lb (kg) The vehicle identification number plate is at-
When any vehicle is to be taken into tached as shown. This number is the identifica-
another country, state, province or district tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle
and registered, its modifications, transpor- registration.
tation, and registration are the responsi-
bility of the user. NISSAN is not
responsible for any inconvenience that
may result.
EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
LABEL LABEL LABEL
The emission control information label is at- The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and The air conditioner specification label is at-
tached to the underside of the hood as shown. Loading Information label affixed to the pillar as tached as shown.
illustrated.
STI0564
load from your trailer will be transferred lb. (98 N) to a single hook *
A or 7 lb. (31 N)
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to to a single hook * B when securing cargo.
determine how this reduces the avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity WARNING
of your vehicle.
. Properly secure all cargo with ropes
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm or straps to help prevent it from
that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle sliding or shifting. Do not place
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle cargo higher than the seatbacks. In
Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle. a sudden stop or collision, unse-
(See “MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS” cured cargo could cause personal
later in this section.) injury.
Also check tires for proper inflation pres- . The child restraint top tether strap
sures. See the Tire and Loading Information may be damaged by contact with
label. items in the cargo area. Secure any
items in the cargo area. Your child
could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision if the top tether strap is
damaged.
. Do not load your vehicle any heavier
than the GVWR or the maximum
SIC3596 front and rear GAWRs. If you do,
parts of your vehicle can break, tire
SECURING THE LOAD damage could occur, or it can
There are tie down hooks located in the cargo change the way your vehicle han-
area as shown. The tie down hooks can be used dles. This could result in loss of
to secure cargo with ropes or other types of control and cause personal injury.
straps.
Do not apply a total load of more than 22
9-14 Technical and consumer information
TOWING A TRAILER
CAUTION
Vehicle damage resulting from impro-
per towing procedures are not covered
by NISSAN warranties.
STI0542 TI1012M
required to achieve the rating. Additional pas- later in this section. Example:
sengers, cargo and/or optional equipment, such
as the trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle 2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the . Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed
and reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing GCWR. The remaining amount is the avail- on a scale - including passengers, cargo
capacity and trailer tongue load. able maximum towing capacity. and hitch - 4,926 lb. (2,234 kg).
The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weigh . Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) from
confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, Front your trailer on a scale with all equipment and F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label -
GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined Weight cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it is 5,263 lb. (2,387 kg).
towed. Make sure the Gross trailer weight is not
Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.
more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating . Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)
All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured shown on the trailer and is not more than the from “Towing Load/Specification” chart -
using platform type scales commonly found at calculated available maximum towing capacity. 8,300 lb. (3,765 kg).
truck stops, highway weigh stations, building
Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale . Maximum Trailer towing capacity from “Tow-
supply centers or salvage yards. ing Load/Specification” chart - 3,500 lb.
to make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and
To determine the available payload capacity for Rear Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front (1,588 kg).
tongue load, use the following procedure. Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight 5,263 lb. (2,387 kg) GVWR
on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. − 4,926 lb. (2,234 kg) GVW
1. Locate the GVWR on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V. The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to
S.S. certification label. be moved or removed to meet the specified Available for tongue
= 337 lb. (152 kg)
ratings. weight
2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of
the passengers and cargo that are normally
in the vehicle when towing a trailer. 8,300 lb. (3,765 kg) GCWR
− 4,926 lb. (2,234 kg) GVW
3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the
GVWR. The remaining amount is the avail- Capacity available for
= 3,374 lb. (1,530 kg)
able maximum tongue load. towing
To determine the available towing capacity, use 337 lb. (152 kg) / Available tongue weight
the following procedure.
3,374 lb. (1,530 kg) Available capacity
1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the = 10 % tongue weight
“Towing Load/Specification” chart found
Tire pressures trailer lights while using the vehicle tail abnormal nose-up or nose-down condition;
. When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle light, stoplight and turn signal circuits check for improper tongue load, overload,
as a signal source. The module/con- worn suspension or other possible causes
tires to the recommended cold tire of either condition.
pressure indicated on the Tire and verter must draw no more than 15
Loading Information label. milliamps from the stop and tail lamp . Always secure items in the trailer to prevent
circuits. Using a module/converter that load shift while driving.
. Trailer tire condition, size, load rating exceeds these power requirements may
and proper inflation pressure should be . Keep the cargo load as low as possible in
damage the vehicle’s electrical system. the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity
in accordance with the trailer and tire See a reputable trailer dealer to obtain low.
manufacturers’ specifications. the proper equipment and to have it
installed. . Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the
Safety chains trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in
Always use a suitable chain between your Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or the back half. Also make sure the load is
vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should local regulations. For assistance in hooking up balanced side to side.
be crossed and should be attached to the hitch, trailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or
not to the vehicle bumper or axle. The safety . Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure,
reputable trailer dealer. vehicle tire pressure, trailer light operation,
chains can be attached to the bumper if the
hitch ball is mounted to the bumper. Be sure to Trailer brakes and trailer wheel lug nuts every time you
leave enough slack in the chains to permit attach a trailer to the vehicle.
If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,
turning corners. make sure it conforms to federal and/or local . Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to
regulations and that it is properly installed. all federal, state or local regulations. If not,
Trailer lights install any mirrors required for towing before
WARNING driving the vehicle.
CAUTION
. Determine the overall height of the vehicle
Never connect a trailer brake system and trailer so the required clearance is
When splicing into the vehicle electrical
directly to the vehicle brake system. known.
system, a commercially available
power-type module/converter must be Pre-towing tips Trailer towing tips
used to provide power for all trailer
. Be certain your vehicle maintains a level In order to gain skill and an understanding of the
lighting. This unit uses the vehicle vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,
position when a loaded or unloaded trailer is
battery as a direct power source for all hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it has an stopping and backing up in an area which is free
Technical and consumer information 9-21
from traffic. Steering stability, and braking the wheels and applying the parking When going up a long grade, downshift the
performance will be somewhat different than brake, transmission damage could oc- transmission to a lower gear and reduce
under normal driving conditions. cur. speed to reduce chances of engine over-
loading and/or overheating.
. Always secure items in the trailer to prevent
load shift while driving. 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal. . If the engine coolant rises to an extremely
2. Have someone place blocks on the downhill high temperature when the air conditioning
. Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or system is on, turn off the air conditioner.
lock to prevent the coupler from inadver- side of the vehicle and trailer wheels.
Coolant heat can be additionally vented by
tently becoming unlatched. 3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowly opening the windows, switching the fan
. Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops. release the brake pedal until the blocks control to high and setting the temperature
absorb the vehicle load. control to the HOT position.
. Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.
4. Apply the parking brake. . Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal
. Always drive your vehicle at a moderate circumstances.
speed. Some states or provinces have 5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).
specific speed limits for vehicles that are . Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles
6. Turn off the engine.
towing trailers. Obey the local speed limits. (800 km).
To drive away:
. When backing up, hold the bottom of the . Have your vehicle serviced more often than
steering wheel with one hand. Move your 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal. at intervals specified in the recommended
hand in the direction in which you want the maintenance schedule in the NISSAN Ser-
2. Start the engine. vice and Maintenance Guide.
trailer to go. Make small corrections and
back up slowly. If possible, have someone 3. Shift the transmission into gear. . When making a turn, your trailer wheels will
guide you when you are backing up. be closer to the inside of the turn than your
4. Release the parking brake.
Always block the wheels on both vehicle and vehicle wheels. To compensate for this,
trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not 5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are make a larger than normal turning radius
recommended; however, if you must do so: clear from the blocks. during the turn.
6. Apply and hold the brake pedal. . Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely
CAUTION 7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.
affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-
ing vehicle sway. When being passed by
If you move the shift selector lever to . When going down a hill, shift into a lower larger vehicles, be prepared for possible
the P (Park) position before blocking gear and use the engine braking effect. changes in crosswinds that could affect
9-22 Technical and consumer information
vehicle handling. If swaying does occur, without applying the brakes. When towing a trailer, the transmission
firmly grip the steering wheel, steer straight fluid should be changed more frequently.
ahead, and immediately (but gradually) . Avoid holding the brake pedal down too For additional information, see the “8.
reduce vehicle speed. This combination will long or too frequently. This could cause the Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section
help stabilize the vehicle. Never increase brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced earlier in this manual.
speed. braking efficiency.
. Increase your following distance to allow for FLAT TOWING
Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:
greater stopping distances while towing a Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the
1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually. ground is sometimes called flat towing. This
allow the vehicle to coast and steer as method is sometimes used when towing a
straight ahead as the road conditions allow. . Do not use cruise control while towing a
vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a
This combination will help stabilize the trailer.
motor home.
vehicle. . Some states or provinces have specific
— Do not correct trailer sway by steering or regulations and speed limits for vehicles CAUTION
applying the brakes. that are towing trailers. Obey the local
speed limits. . Failure to follow these guidelines
2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply can result in severe transmission
the brakes and pull to the side of the road in . Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness
connections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after damage.
a safe area.
50 miles (80 km) of travel and at every . Whenever flat towing your vehicle,
3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is break. always tow forward, never back-
balanced as described earlier in this section. ward.
. When stopped in traffic for long periods of
. Be careful when passing other vehicles. time in hot weather, put the vehicle in the P . DO NOT tow any continuously vari-
Passing while towing a trailer requires (Park) position. able transmission vehicle with all
considerably more distance than normal four wheels on the ground (flat
passing. Remember the length of the trailer . When launching a boat, don’t allow the
water level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE
must also pass the other vehicle before you
rear bumper. internal transmission parts due to
can safely change lanes.
lack of transmission lubrication.
. Down shift the transmission to a lower gear . Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights
before backing the trailer into the water or . DO NOT tow an All-Wheel Drive
for engine braking when driving down steep
the trailer lights may burn out. (AWD) vehicle with any of the
or long hills. This will help slow the vehicle
wheels on the ground. Doing so
Technical and consumer information 9-23
loading, either separately or in combi- Your NISSAN is covered by the following If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
nation, can cause heat build-up and emission warranties. which could cause a crash or could cause
possible tire failure. For USA: injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
. Emission Defects Warranty Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
. Emissions Performance Warranty notifying NISSAN.
Details of these warranties may be found with If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty In- may open an investigation, and if it finds
formation Booklet which comes with your that a safety defect exists in a group of
NISSAN. If you did not receive a Warranty vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
Information Booklet, or it has become lost, you campaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-
may obtain a replacement by writing to:
come involved in individual problems be-
. Nissan North America, Inc. tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003 To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Franklin, TN 37068-5003 Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-
327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
For Canada:
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Ad-
Emission Control System Warranty ministrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,
Details of these warranties may be found with SW., Washington, D.C. 20590. You can
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty In- also obtain other information about motor
formation Booklet which comes with your vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.
NISSAN. If you did not receive a Warranty gov.
Information Booklet, or it has become lost, you
may obtain a replacement by writing to: You may notify NISSAN by contacting our
Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at
. Nissan Canada Inc. 1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647-7261).
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario,
L4W 4Z5
Technical and consumer information 9-25
A vehicle equipped with All-Wheel Drive (AWD) “ready”. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 at least 10 times.
should never be tested using a two wheel
dynamometer (such as the dynamometers used If the MIL indicates the vehicle is in a “not ready” 7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h)
by some states for emissions testing), or similar condition, drive the vehicle through the following and maintain the speed for at least 3
equipment. Make sure you inform test facility pattern to set the vehicle to the “ready condi- minutes.
personnel that your vehicle is equipped with tion”. If you cannot or do not want to perform the
driving pattern, a NISSAN dealer can conduct it 8. Stop the vehicle. Place the transmission
AWD before it is placed on a dynamometer. selector lever in the P (Park) or N (Neutral)
Using the wrong test equipment may result in for you.
position.
transmission damage or unexpected vehicle
movement which could result in serious vehicle WARNING 9. Turn the engine off.
damage or personal injury.
10. Repeat steps 1 through 8 at least one more
Always drive the vehicle in a safe and
Due to legal requirements in some states/areas time.
prudent manner according to traffic
or provinces, your vehicle may be required to be
conditions and obey all traffic laws. If step 1 through 7 is interrupted, repeat the
in what is called the “ready condition” for an
preceding step. Any safe driving mode is
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emis- 1. Start the engine. Allow the engine to idle acceptable between steps. Do not stop the
sion control system. until the engine coolant temperature gauge engine until step 7 is completed.
The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when needle points between the C and H (normal
it is driven through certain driving patterns. operating temperature).
Usually, the “ready condition” can be obtained 2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88
by ordinary usage of the vehicle. km/h), then quickly release the accelerator
If a powertrain system component is repaired or pedal completely and keep it released for at
the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be least 10 seconds.
reset to a “not ready condition”. Before taking 3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a
the I/M test, check the vehicle’s inspection/ moment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of
maintenance test readiness condition. Turn the 53 to 60 MPH (86 to 96 km/h) for at least 9
ignition switch to the ON position without minutes.
starting the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and 4. Stop the vehicle. Leave the engine running.
then blinks for 10 seconds, the I/M test
condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not 5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h)
blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is and maintain the speed for 20 seconds.
9-26 Technical and consumer information
OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE
EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data ment, could combine the EDR data with the type A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is of personally identifying data routinely acquired source of service and repair information for your
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like during a crash investigation. vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations
situations, such as an air bag deployment or and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in To read data recorded by an EDR, special procedures, this manual is the same one used
understanding how a vehicle’s systems per- equipment is required and access to the vehicle by the factory trained technicians working at a
formed. The EDR is designed to record data or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle NISSAN dealer. Also available are genuine
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems manufacturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, and genuine
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds such as law enforcement, that have the special NISSAN Service and Owner’s Manuals for older
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to equipment, can read the information if they have NISSAN models.
record such data as: access to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will
only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle In the USA:
. How various systems in your vehicle were owner or lessee or as otherwise required or
operating; For current pricing and availability of genuine
permitted by law.
NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model
. Whether or not the driver and passenger year and later, contact:
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
1-800-450-9491
. How far (if at all) the driver was depressing www.nissan-techinfo.com
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, For current pricing and availability of genuine
. How fast the vehicle was traveling. NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model
year and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:
. Sounds are not recorded.
1-800-247-5321
These data can help provide a better under- For current pricing and availability of genuine
standing of the circumstances in which crashes NISSAN Owner’s Manuals for this model year
and injuries occur. and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle 1-800-247-5321
only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data
are recorded by the EDR under normal driving In Canada:
conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN
gender, age and crash location) are recorded. Service Manual or Owner’s Manual please
However, other parties, such as law enforce- contact a NISSAN dealer. For the phone number
Technical and consumer information 9-27
and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area call Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit
the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387- unnecessary excess wear and tear expenses at
0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representative will the end of your lease.
assist you.
NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones
Also available are genuine NISSAN Service and to minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate
Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models. the windshield of your vehicle in an accident.
Non-genuine (imitation) parts may not provide
IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION such built-in safeguards. Also, non-genuine
Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this parts often show premature wear, rust and
unlikely event, there is some important informa- corrosion.
tion you should know. Why should you take a chance?
Many insurance companies routinely authorize In over 40 states, the law says you must be
the use of non-genuine collision parts in order to advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair
cut costs, among other reasons. your vehicle. And some states have enacted
laws that restrict insurance companies from
Insist on the use of Genuine NISSAN authorizing the use of non-genuine collision
Collision Parts! parts during the new vehicle warranty. These
If you want your vehicle to be restored using laws help protect you, so you can take action to
parts made to NISSAN’s original exacting protect yourself.
specifications — if you want to help it to last
and hold its resale value, the solution is simple. It’s your right!
Tell your insurance agent and your repair If you should need further information visit us at:
shop to only use Genuine NISSAN Colli-
www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or
sion Parts. NISSAN does not warrant non-
www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)
NISSAN parts, nor does NISSAN’s warranty
apply to damage caused by a non-genuine part.
Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protect
your personal safety, preserve your warranty
protection and maintain the resale value of your
vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using
9-28 Technical and consumer information
10 Index
A Ashtray (See cigarette lighter and ashtray) . . . . . . 2-40 Break-in schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Brightness control
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 Display ON/OFF button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Advanced air bag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51 Audio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Air bag system Steering wheel audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61 Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Advanced air bag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51 Auto closure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Front passenger air bag and status light . . . . 1-52 Autochanger, Compact Disc (CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Front-seat mounted side-impact Autolight system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 C
supplemental air bag system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55 Automatic
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and Cabin air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
rollover supplemental air bag system. . . . . . . . . 1-55 Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . 9-2
Drive positioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Air bag warning labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58 Car phone or CB radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Seat positioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58, 2-14 Cargo cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 Cargo floor box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Air conditioner Cargo lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
B
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 Catalytic converter, Three way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Air conditioner service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 Back door (See lift gate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 CD/CF care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Air conditioner specification label . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Center multi-function control panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Air conditioning system refrigerant and Battery saver system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
lubricant recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30, 9-6 Keyfob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 Variable voltage control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Installation using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
Alarm, How to stop alarm Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Installation using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
(see vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System LATCH system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Alcohol, drugs and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 (with navigation system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75 Precautions on child restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
All-wheel drive (AWD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System Top tether strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
All-wheel drive (AWD) warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 (without navigation system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85 Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41 Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Brake Chimes, Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) warning light . . . 2-11 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Cigarette lighter and ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Appearance care Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Circuit breaker, Fusible link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Exterior appearance care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2, 7-4
Interior appearance care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Coat hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 Dot matrix liquid crystal display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Command (See Bluetooth® Hands-Free Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Phone System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76, 4-90 Drive positioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Command (See INFINITI voice recognition Driving Engine start operation indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11, 4-104 All-wheel drive (AWD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 If your vehicle overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Compact Disc (CD) changer Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
(See audio system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Driving with CVT Entry/exit function, Automatic drive positioner . . . 3-30
Compact Disc (CD) player/changer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46 (Continuously Variable Transmission). . . . . . . . . 5-13 Event Data Recorders (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
CompactFlash (CF) player On-pavement and off-road driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
(See audio system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 F
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
DVD player, NISSAN mobile entertainment. . . . . . 4-63
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 Filter
E
Coolant Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Capacities and recommended fuel/ Economy, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Changing engine oil and filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Elapsed time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) . . . 2-36
Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Flat tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Corrosion protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Engine Floor mat cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Cover, Cargo cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Fluid
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Break-in schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 Capacities and recommended fuel/ Capacities and recommended fuel/
CVT, Driving with CVT lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
(Continuously Variable Transmission). . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
Changing engine oil and filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
D Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Daytime running light system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Checking engine oil level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Defroster switch, Rear window and outside Coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
mirror defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 Engine block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 FM-AM radio with Compact Disc (CD)
Display cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Display controls Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD)
(See center multi-function control panel) . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . . . . . . 9-5 changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Door/lift gate open warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Engine oil replacement indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
10-2
10-3
License plate, Installing front license plate. . . . . . . 9-11 Luggage hooks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46 N
Lift gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Luggage side box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Light New vehicle break-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58 M NISSAN Mobile entertainment system (MES) . . . 4-63
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Maintenance NISSAN voice recognition system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
Cargo lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 No key warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Indicators for maintenance (dot matrix) . . . . . . 2-20 O
Headlights bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Maintenance information (display) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Interior light control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53 Off-road recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Maintenance precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53 Oil
Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53 Capacities and recommended fuel/
Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Mood lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54 lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53 Changing engine oil and filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Malfunction indicator light (MIL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24 Checking engine oil level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Vanity mirror lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Warning/indicator lights and audible Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Master warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Oil filter replacement indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Mechanical key (Intelligent Key system). . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Xenon headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 Operation, Indicators for operation
Memory storage, Automatic drive positioner. . . . . 3-31
Lights, Exterior and interior light replacement . . . 8-27 (dot matrix) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Meter, Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Loading information Outside air temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
(See vehicle loading information) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Lock Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Overdrive OFF switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Mirror
Overheat, If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order
Lift gate lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Power door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Locking with mechanical key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Monitor, Rearview monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 P
Low fuel warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Mood lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 Panic alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Low outside temperature warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Multi-function controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Parking
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Music box hard-disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52 Brake break-in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Low tire pressure warning system (See tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Low washer fluid warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Parking brake release warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
10-4
Parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 FM-AM radio with Compact Disc (CD) Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53 changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44, 4-39 Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Phone Rain-sensing auto wiper system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Rear center seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
(with navigation system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75 Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) Seat belt cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
(without navigation system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85 Rear center seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 Seat belt hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Car phone or CB radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74 Rear door lock, Child safety rear door lock. . . . . . . . 3-7 Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Power Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Rear window and outside mirror defroster Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Power door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Seat belts with pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57
Power outlet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 Rearview monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Recorders, Event data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Three-point type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 Registering your vehicle in another country. . . . . . . . 9-8
Seat(s)
Precautions Remote controller (DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Driver-side memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Audio operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 Remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Braking precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Reporting safety defects (US only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 Rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Security system, Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . 2-25
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Roof, Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
Driving safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 System), Engine start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 S
Selector lever
On-pavement and off-road driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Safety Shift lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Seat belt usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Child seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45 Reporting safety defects (US only). . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 SETTING button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
When starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 SHIFT “P” warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 Seat adjustment Shift lock release, Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Push-button ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9, 5-10 Front manual seat adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Shifting, CVT
“PUSH” warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 (Continuously Variable Transmission). . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
R Small light indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Seat belt(s)
Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39, 9-7
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Infants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Car phone or CB radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
10-5
10-6
10-7